tieng anh 10 theo dinh huong nang luc giao an 4 cot

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (2.33 MB, 148 trang )

(1)Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Week 1 Period 1 Date of preparing:. 20 / 8/ 16 Date of teaching ORIENTATION : GOALS & PURPOSES. /8/ 16. I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: overall knowledge of English 10 2. Skills: 3. Attitude: - Actively take part in classroom activities 4. Main points: goals of English 10 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: get the way how to do tasks. II. Teaching preparation 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk. 2. Preparation of students: textbook, notebook, pen…. III. Activities of teaching and learning Content. Teacher’s activities Asks ss to discuss 2 qs:. I. Warm up 1.What is the aim of learning English? 2. What are your methods of learning English II. The content - The book is composed as 6 main topics with 15 units and 6 Tests (do not learn unit 15) - 6 main topics: + Personal information: school talks, people’s background, daily activities + Education: special education, technology, an excursion + Community: the mass media, the story of my village + Nature and environment: undersea world, conservation, national parks. + Recreation: music, films and cinema, the world cup + People and places: historical places. .- introduces the contents, skills and language knowledge. III-Test: 1-Check frequency knowledge for the previous lesson.( Oral tests) 2-Fifteen minutes test (3 times): 1st test will be scored by Pretest 10( knowledge from grade 9 and in unit 1,2,3 English 10) 3-One period test (2 tests in each semester: 60%multiple choice, 40% writing ) 4-Semester test (Once for each semester). T introduces the testing. Students’ activities -Students listen to T’s explanation about six topics -Listen and take notes in their notebooks.. Competences speaking. Knowing the content. Take note. IV. Consolidation+ homework - the content and the tests - preparation for the new lesson IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences 1. Table of description of competence level. Levels Content Orientation. RECOGNITION Free discussion Greeting and introduction Format of the curriculum. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. UNDERSTANDING 4 skills and language knowledge (Vocab, pronunciation and Grammar). 1. APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATI APPLICATION ON The testing Awareness of the importance of learning English. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(2) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises - What is the content of English 10? - How is this subject evaluated?. Week 1 Period 2 Date of preparing:. 20 / 8/ 2016. Date of teaching. /8/20 16. UNIT 1: A DAY IN THE LIFE OF….. - Part A: Reading Allocated time: 45 minutes I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: Students will be able to know vocabulary items related to daily routines of farmers 2. Skills: Integrated skills( mainly Reading skills) - Improve reading skills through guessing meaning in context and answering questions. 3. Attitude: It aims to understand more about daily routines of farmers, 4. Main points: vocabulary about the daily activities of farmers, passage information about Mr. Vy and Mrs. Tuyet’s daily activities 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: get the way how to do tasks. II. Teaching preparation 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk. 2. Preparation of students: textbook, notebook, pen… III. Activities of teaching and learning Content I. Warm up (7 mins) - T asks students to guess “ Who am I?” 1. I plant trees or raise cattle. 2. I work on a farm. 3. I work hard.. I. Pre-reading:(15 mins) Questions: * Who is he /she? * What is he/ she doing? * Where is he/ she doing? Expected answer: He is working with his buffalo on the farm New words. + peasant [['peznt] (n) = farmer (use Picture) +to lead the buffalo to the field. +to plough and harrow: +to repair the banks of the pilot of land (translation): + to pump water: +To take a short rest (translation): to have a rest for a short time. + transplant (v):grow rice do the transplanting II. While-reading:(15 mins) Task 1: Choose the best answer. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Teacher’s activities. Competenc es - T asks students to talk talk about their Speaking about their daily daily routine, using routine, using cues in cues in textbook textbook - Ss answer the - Has Ss work in pairs, questions. A farmer look at the picture in the textbook and describe it Work in pairs. - T leads to the new Use some guides: lesson: unit 1: A day in where, who, what, the life of… - Part A: how Reading Knowing - Calls on some Ss to - Give their vocabulary give their answers. answers. about the - Gives feedback. text - Pre-teaches some new Take notes words. - nông dân - dắt trâu ra đồng - cày và bừa - sửa luống cày Reads the words out - bơm nước loud and has students - nghỉ ngơi repeat. - cấy. - Has Ss choose the best option. 2. Students’ activities. Do task 1. Guessing meaning of. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(3) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Expected answer: 1C, 2C, 3A, 4A. - Calls on some Ss to give the answers.. Task 2: Answering the questions Expected answer 1. He is a farmer. 2. He gets up at 4.30 and then he goes down to the kitchen to boil some water for his morning tea. 3. In the morning he ploughs and harrows his plot of land, drinks tea and smoke local tobacco during his break. 4. In the afternoon, they repair the banks of their plot of land. Mr.Vy pumps water into it while his wife does the transplanting. 5.Yes, they are because they love working and their children. III. Post-reading:( 5 mins) (For good students) Talk about Mr. Vy and Mrs. Tuyet’s daily activities IV. Consolidation and homework:(2 mins). - Lets Ss read the questions in the book and underline the key words. - Has students read the passage and find out the answers in pairs. - Calls on some pairs to give their answers.. - the day in the life of a farmer. words in context Do Task 2. - Give their answers.. Asking and answering questions. read the questions in the book and underline the key words. give their answers.. T explains the main ideas. Present the talk. Presenting a topic. Summarises the main points of the lesson. - Asks Ss to learn new words and prepare the new lesson.. IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences 1. Table of description of competence level. Levels Content Daily activities of farmers. RECOGNITION L1 - vocabulary about daily activities of farmers. APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATION L3 APPLICATION L4 Passage Talking about Mr. comprehension Vy and Mrs. Tuyet’s (Answer the daily routines questions). UNDERSTANDING L2 - Guessing meaning in context. 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises A. Recognition: Choose the best option A, B or C to complete each sentence. 1. We took a short_____ for thirty minutes in the middle of the afternoon. A. talk B. meal C. rest D. time. 2. I was late for school this morning because my alarm clock didn’t_______ A. go on B. go off C. go away D. go up 3. Are you contented____ your present job, Mrs. Tuyet? A. to B. for C.of D. with 4. We talk in a friendly way about our work. A. chat B. learn C. discuss D. sing 5. John is not a farmer so he never___________. A. do the transplanting B. do transplanting C. does the transplanting D. did transplanting B. Understanding: Choose the best option A, B or C to complete each sentence. 1.We had a nice chat over a cup of tea last night. A. formal talk B. informal talk C. serious talk D. long talk 2. Doing homework is a student’s daily routine. A. thing one rarely does B. thing one regularly does. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 3. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(4) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School C. thing one occasionally does D. thing one never does 3. She’s upstairs getting ready to go out. A. dressing B. determining C. planning 4. My morning ____________ is to get up at seven, have breakfast, then leave home at eight. A. timetable B. habit C. routine D. action 5. It often takes me twenty minutes______ready. A. getting B. to get C. get D- gets 6. Mr.Vy is a farmer and he is very good at_______. A. ploughed B. ploughs C. to plough D. ploughing C. Low and High application: Read the passage, then choose the correct answer –a, b. c. or d. ROUTINES. D. preparing. Think about your daily life. Do you follow the same road to work every day? Do you sit in the same place in class? When you get dressed, do you always put the same leg or arm in first? You probably do, because we all have routines in our lives. Routines save time and energy because you do them without thinking, that's why they are so important in the morning when your brain isn't active. Here's Jo talking about her morning routine. 'Oh yes. I always do exactly the same things. 1 wake up at seven o'clock every morning, but I don't get quarter past seven. I switch on the radio and listen to the news. Then I go to the loo and I brush my- teeth. I have a shower and dry my hair. Then I choose my clothes and I get dressed. I don't eat anything for breakfast. I just have a cup of coffee. Then I go to work. Yes, it's always the same.' Routines are very useful but they also make you uncreative. So sometimes it's a good idea to break your routines. Get out of bed on the opposite side. Listen to a different radio station. Take a different route to work. Eat something different for breakfast. Change your routine. You never know, it could change your life. 1. This passage is mainly concerned with ................. a. our usual ways of doing things b. our daily activities c. Jo's timetable d. changes in our lives 2. According to the passage, routines are useful because................ a. we can do them in the morning b. they make a habit of never thinking c. they save time and energy d. we all have them in our lives 3. The word 'loo' in line 9 can best be replaced with ................ a. balcony b. bedroom c. sink d. toilet 4. What is the main disadvantage of routines? a.Routines make us unable to create things or to have new ideas. b. Routines may change our life. c. Routines make a habit of never thinking before doing. d. Routines make us do the same things day after day. 5. Which of the sentences is true? a. Routines make our brain creative. b. People who have routines are unable to think. c. We shouldn't break our routines. d. Our lives could be changed if we change our routines. Self-evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………….............. .................................................................................................................................................................. Week 1 Period 3 Date of preparing:. 20 / 8/ 16. Date of teaching. /8/ 16. UNIT 1: A DAY IN THE LIFE OF….. - Part B: Speaking Allocated time: 45 minutes I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: Students will be able to know more about the daily activities of students - Use vocabulary items related to daily routines and talk about their daily activities. 2. Skills: Integrated skills( mainly speaking skills) - Improve speaking skills through asking for and giving information from a timetable 3. Attitude: It aims to understand more about daily routines of students 4. Main points: vocabulary about the timetable and daily activities of a student,making and answering questions. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 4. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(5) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: get the way how to do tasks. II. Teaching preparation 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk. 2. Preparation of students: textbook, notebook, pen…. III. Activities of teaching and learning Content 1. Check-up: (5 mins) Reading questions about Mr.Vy and Mrs. Tuyet’s daily routines and give the meaning of new words. 2. Warm up: (10 mins) Who knows best? Expected answer: 1.Civic education 6.Biology 2.Technology 7.Chemistry 3.Mathematics 8.History 4.Physics 9.Geography 5.Literature 10.Physical education 3. PRE-SPEAKING 10ms Match a number A with a suitable phrase in B Handout Expected answer: 1d,2c,3b,4a,5e,6g,7h,8f. 4.WHILE- SPEAKING 13ms TASK 1:Set the scene Model: T: What time does Quan have Civic education lesson on Monday? S: He has Civic education at a quarter past seven on Monday. T: What lesson does Quan have at quarter past seven on Monday? S: He has Civic education lesson. T asks ss to take notes: + what time/ lesson + have…. Lesson + at time + on days of week TASK 2: Describe the picture *What is Quan doing in picture a,b,c…..? * Is he getting up?/studying his lesson/ watching TV/ going to the stadium by bicycle/ playing football/ coming home/taking a shower/ having dinner/ reviewing his lesson? *What time does he get up/study his lesson….? Describe the actions in the pictures - take a short nap. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. Competenc es Recalling the previous lesson. SS have to answer questions about Mr.Vy and Mrs. Tuyet’s daily routines and give the meaning of new words. Write down names of subjects in 5 minutes, the group that has the most correct words will Rememberi win the game. ng names of subjects. -T asks ss to work in groups to write down names of subjects in 5 minutes, the group that has the most correct words will win the game. – T leads to the new lesson: unit 1: B: Speaking helps Ss to revise how to say the Match a number A with Rememberi time, asks Ss to a suitable phrase in B ng how to match a number A -Ss work individually say time A and the compare B with a suitable their 1, 7:15 a. aaquarter phrase in B answers with friend. to ten 2, 8:05 b. five to nine 3, 8:55 five past eight - match thec.numbers 4, 9:45 d. with words a quarter past seven 5, 10:40 e. twenty to eleven T can help Ss 6, 17:00 f. half past six p.m remember the ways 7, 6:00 g. five o’clock p.m to say the time 8, 18:30 h. six o’clock a.m -T asks Ss to look Ss look at Quan Asking and at Quan weekly weekly timetable and answering timetable on page work in pairs. about the 15.Ask and answer Ss substitutes the timetable questions with a underlined words partner, using the from the model with information from the words in the the timetable. timetable T makes a short A: What time does dialogue with a Quan have student ……………….. lesson on ………………..? B: He has ………….. -T keeps Ss work in at a ………….on pair and asks them ……………… to study the picture. A: What lesson does T may help by Quan have at ……… asking questions on………? such as: S: He has Talking -T goes around the ………………lesson. about class and provides Quan’s help if necessary. Ss work individually activities in -T calls on some Ss and talk about Quan’s the. 5. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(6) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School -study lessons -watch Tv - go to the stadium by bicycle - play football - come home - take a shower - have dinner - review lesson. to speak aloud their answers.. 4.Post- Speaking: 5ms Tell your classmates about your daily routine. only talk about their main / important activities. Sample: Everyday I get up at….. IV. Consolidation and homework:(2 mins) Consolidation:-Ask and answer about somebody’s daily routine Homework: -Write a short passage about 50 words about your daily life - Prepare next lesson LISTENING.. T asks Ss to close your textbooks and tell your classmates about your daily routine. -T calls some Ss to present in front of class and give them mark. T summarises the main points of the lesson. IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences 1. Table of description of competence level Levels Content Daily activities of a student. RECOGNITION L1 Words about time, days , subject and daily activities. UNDERSTANDING L2 Asking and answering about the timetable. activities, using the picture. Note: Use some conjunctions such as: Then.......... After.......... After that... Last......... -Ss work individually and then present in front of class. tell your classmates about your daily routine. Note: Ss only talk about their main / important activities present in front of class. afternoon using pictures. Talking about your daily routines. APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATION L3 APPLICATION L4 Talking about Quan’s activities in the afternoon using pictures. Talking about your daily routines. 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises A. Recognition: 1. I leave the house at a quarter past five and arrive in the field at exactly 5.30. A. 10 minutes B. 15 minutes C. 20 minutes D. 30 minutes 2. “_______ do you often go to school?” - “At 6.30 every morning.” A. How B. What time C. Who D. With whom 3_______ class allows students to acquire knowledge about living things. A. Geography B. Chemistry C. Biology D. History B. Understanding, Low and High application: Talk about daily activities For example: Speaker: I am a tenth-grade student. I go to school in the afternoon. I have 5 lessons on…. My first lesson Self-evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………….............. ................................................................................................................................................................. Ngày 22 tháng 08 năm 2016 TTCM ký duyệt tuần 1. HỨA THỊ HOÀI THANH. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 6. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(7) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School. Class: Preparing date: 27/08/2016 Teaching date: …./08/2016. Week: 02 Period: 04 UNIT 1: A DAY IN THE LIFE OF….. - Part C: Listening Allocated time: 45 minutes. I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: a listening text about a day in the life of a cyclo driver, words related to the topic 2. Skills: Listening skills (listen to a monologue) - Listening and numbering pictures - Deciding on True or False statements 3. Attitude: It aims to understand more about daily routines of a cyclo driver 4. Main points: vocabulary: district, routine, drop, purchases, passengers, foodstall, skills to do tasks: numbering pictures, deciding on T/ F statements and using vocabulary items related to activities of a cyclo driver to talk about this. 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: get the way how to do tasks. II. Teaching preparation 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk. 2. Preparation of students: textbook, notebook, pen… III. Activities of teaching and learning Content Teacher’s activities 1. Check-up: (5 mins) SS have to talk about their Gives the request timetable and daily activities -T asks ss to work in 2. Warm up: (10 mins) groups to play Game : He gets up very early. Job Riddles He works in the streets. He gets people from one place to another.. Students’ activities SS have to talk about their timetable and daily activities. Competences Speaking skills. students listen to 3 questions, answer them. T leads to the new lesson: Aday in the life of a cyclo driver unit 1C: Listening. He is a cyclo driver. 3. New lesson: I. PRE-LISTENING Activity1:Ask and answer 1. Have you ever travelled by cyclo? 2. When was it? 3. Is it interesting to travel by cyclo? 4. Which do you prefer, going by bicycle or by cyclo? Give reasons. Activity 2:Pronounce these words ( textbook) + district (n): smaller than a province. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. - Tell Ss to work in pair to ask and answer the following questions: -T can explain these words quickly and asks Ss to listen and repeat. 7. Work in pairs. ( Students may not have any experience about traveling by cyclo, they may know this via TV). Recognition Vocabulary about the listening text Sts will be able to know the meaning of words and pronounce them correctly. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(8) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School + drop (v):leave somebody at a place + pedal ['pedl] (n): bàn đạp + purchase[’pɜ: t∫əs] goods + passenger[’pæsindʒə] (n): hành khách + park (v) + foodstall: where to eat II.WHILE- LISTENING TASK 1: Matching pictures You will hear Mr.Lam, a cyclo driver in Ho Chi Minh city, talk about his morning activities. The pictures in your textbook (on page 16) describe his activites. Listen to the tape/ my reading. Then number the pictures in their correct order. Exploit the pictures: Picture a: the man is driving a cyclo, his passenger is a lady Picture b: the man is having a meal at a foodstall Picture c: his passengers are 2 pupils Picture d: he is taking a rest under a tree Picture e: he gets up Picture f: his passenger is a man Expected answer:1e,2f,3a,4c,5b,6d TASK 2:True or false Expected answer: 1.F(not given) 2.T 3.F( He takes his passengers from District 5 to District 1) 4.F( His first passenger is an old man) 5.F(He has lunch at a foodstall near Ben Thanh Market) 6 F(He takes a short a rest).  III. POST- LISTENING For good students) Ask and answer about Mr. Lam’s activi Suggested questions: 1. What is the man’s name? 2. What does he do? 3. What time does he start work? 4. Who are his passengers? Is his first passenger an old man? 5. Where does he have lunch? 6. Does he take a rest? Cues used to talk about Mr.Lam’s activities Name............................start......................work.... ..................lunch ......................occupation......................passengers ......................rest IV. Consolidation and homework:. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. -T asks Ss to open their textbooks and describe the pictures first. Then T asks Ss to discuss the groups to guess the correct order of pictures.T presents the situation: Plays the tape twice and checks the class. Plays the tape the last time and gives feedback.. T gives some eliciting questions: 1. Where does Mr. Lam live? 2. Does he usually get up early? What time does he get up? 3. Who is his first passenger? Where is he? 4. Who is/ are his second passenger(s)? 5. Where does he have lunch? 6. What does he do after lunch? -T asks Ss to read the statements carefully first. -Play the tape again and ask Ss to listen and decide whether the statements are true or false. -Call on some Ss to explain their answers Tell Ss to work in pairs and ask and answer questions about Mr.Lam’s activities. Listen and repeat after T Take notes some meaning of new words. Understanding and Ordering the pictures Work in group and describe the pictures in textbook Listen to the tape and give their answers.. Listen to the eliciting questions, understand task 2 , listen to the tape and decide on T/F statements True/ False statements Asking and answering questions about Mr. Lam’s activities Pair-work Expected answers: 1. His name is Lam. 2. He is a cyclo driver. 3. He starts work at six. 4. They are an old man, a lady and two school pupils. His first passenger is an old man. 5. He has lunch at a food stall. 6. Yes, he does.. -T goes around the class and offer help if necessary. From above information, retell. 8. Retelling his story. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(9) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School (2 mins) Consolidation:-Retell the story that they have just listened Homework : -Write a story about 50 words about Mr. Lam - Prepare next lesson WRITING. the story in front of class.. to the class using the given cues. Tapescript: U1-10 Hello everyone, my name is Lam. I’m a cyclo driver in Ho Chi Minh City. I usually have a busy working day. I get up at five thirty in the morning. I start work at six. My first passenger is usually an old man. I take him from District 1 to Distric 5. After I drop him at a cafe’ near Ho Chi Minh City College of Education, I pedal to Thai Binh Market. My next passenger is a lady who does shopping there every two days. I help her put all her purchases into the cyclo and then take her to her shop in Tran Hung Dao Street. At about ten thirty I ride off toward Nguyen Thi Minh Khai School. There I park my cyclo, chat with some of my fellows and wait for my third passengers. They are two school pupils, a girl and a boy. I take them home. At twelve I have lunch at a food stall near Ben Thanh Market. After lunch, I park my cyclo under a tree, take a short rest and then continue my afternoon’s work. IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences 1. Table of description of competence level. Levels Content Daily activities of a cyclo driver. RECOGNITION L1 Vocabulary about the listening text. UNDERSTANDING L2 Ordering the pictures. APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATION L3 APPLICATION L4 True/ False statements Asking and answering questions about Mr. Lam’s activities. Retelling his story to the class using the given cues. 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises A. Recognition: 1/ Ask and answer questions about your daily routine , using the cues below. A. action B. trip C. way D. habit 2/Then I go home, take a short rest and have lunch with my family at 11.30. A. break B. relaxation C. while D. time 3/She purchased a number of shares in the company. A. invested B. sold C. exchanged D. bought 4/ Mr. Lam is a .................... . He rides a lot of passengers every day. A. teacher B. doctor C. farmer D. cyclo driver B. Understanding, Low and High application: - Retell about the day in the life of a cyclo driver. - What do you think about the job of a cyclo driver? For example: Self-evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………….............. .............................................................................................................................................................. Class: Week: 02 Preparing date: 19/08/2016 Period: 05 Teaching date: …./08/2016 UNIT 1: A DAY IN THE LIFE OF….. - Part D. Writing Allocated time: 45 minutes I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: vocabulary, tense and useful structures used to write a paragraph about your daily activities 2. Skills: Writing skills ( writing about daily activities) 3. Attitude: It aims to improve writing skills and use vocabulary items related to daily activites to write a paragraph about daily routines of some people ( a student, a farmer and a cyclo driver). Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 9. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(10) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 4. Main points: vocabulary, structures, outline of a paragraph 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: get the way how to do tasks. II. Teaching preparation 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk. 2. Preparation of students: textbook, notebook, pen… III. Activities of teaching and learning Content 1. Check-up: (5 mins) Asking a student to write 5 new words and retell the story about Mr. Lam 2. Warm up: (10 mins) Complete the sentences with the verbs in the box.. Teacher’s activities Asks sts to write some new words and retell at least 3 sentences about Mr. Lam. Students’ activities write some new words and retell at least 3 sentences about Mr. Lam. 1 I get up at 7.15 in the morning. 2 I go to the bathroom and brush my teeth. 3 I have breakfast in the kitchen. 4 I go to school by bus. 5 I have five lessons a day. 6 I go home at 3.00 in the afternoon. 7 I do my homework from 5.00 to 6.00. 8 I have dinner at 6.30. 9 I read a book in bed before sleeping. 10 I go to sleep at 9.30.. Writes down the exercises on the board and asks sts to complete the sentences with the verbs in the box. write down the exercises on the notebooks and complete the exercises. do my homework brush my teeth go to sleep get up have five lessons go home have dinner go to school have breakfast read a book 3. New lesson: I. Pre- writing(10) Read the passage and answer questions My daily routine: My name is Adam. I always wake up at 7 o’clock in the morning then I wash my face and brush my teeth. After that, I do some exercises then I put my clothes on and prepare my school bag. Next, I have my breakfast and wait for the school bus. At 8 o’clock I go to school and start my first class then I go to the second class. After that, I often take my lunch break and talk with my friends. At around 12 noon I go back home and take a rest. Next, I usually watch some TV and chat with my family then I do my homework and help my mother in the house. At 9 o’clock I read a book and go to sleep. Guideline about how to write a paragraph about daily activities - use simple present tenses - list the activities in the order/ chronological order( from morning to evening) - use prepositions and connectors: at.. in…., then, after that, next…, and…. II. While writing( 15’) Use the cues from reading, speaking and listening lessons about the daily activities of a farmer, a. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Competences Revising. Knowing some words about daily activities. Distributes handouts Gives some questions about the sample passage 1. What time does Adam wake up and what does he do after that? 2. What does he do after he does some exercises? 3. What does he do at 8 o’clock? 4. What time does he go back home? 5. How many activities are mentioned in the passage? 6. What are some connectors? 7. How are sentences in the passage organized? 8. Which tense is used to write a paragraph about daily activities? T instructs the requirements and divides the class into 3. 10. Listen to the questions and answer, using information in the passage? 1. At 7 a.m, he washes his face and brushes his teeth. 2. ,,,. Getting to know about the sample writing and understand how to write the passage. Take notes. Work in groups to write passages. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(11) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School student and a cyclo driver to write 3 pagraph. Another task: Write a paragraph (5-8 sentences) to describe your daily activities.. groups to write about the day in the life of Mr. Vy, Quan and Mr. Lam T checks and gives feedback. Write in handouts Peer correction. Being able to correct themselves and their partners. Sample writing: " "Every morning from Monday to Saturday, I get up at 6 o'clock. After breakfast, I go to school by bicycle. It takes me about 20 minutes from my house to get to my school. Usually, I study at school until 11:30 a.m. I return home at noon to have lunch with my family. In the afternoon I attend English and computer classes. I always get home just in time for dinner at 7:30 p.m." (Marguerita – 16 years old) III. Post writing 5’ Present about your daily activities IV. Consolidation and homework: (2 mins) Consolidation:- How to write about daily activities Homework : -Complete the writing - Prepare next lesson Language focus. Using the previous learnt knowledge to write. some good students to present their writings. T asks some good students to present their writings. Practicing speaking. Summarises the main points of the lessons Asks sts to learn by heart vocabulary about daily activities Assigns homework. IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences 1. Table of description of competence level. Levels Content Writing a paragraph about daily activities. RECOGNITION L1 Useful expressions used to write a paragraph about daily routine. UNDERSTANDING L2 The way to organize ideas in a paragraph. APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATION L3 APPLICATIO N L4 Writing a paragraph Writing freely from guided cues about their daily activities. 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises A. Recognition: Find ten daily activities in the word search. R W A S H F G T S E G O H O M E O T A W A T C H T V U D P L A Y I U O D T A S L E E P C Y H A V E L U N C H T A K E T H E B U. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 11. U K N M L S S. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(12) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School B. Understanding, Low and High application: Write the activities in the correct column. have a shower / go to bed / do the homework / go to school / go. home / take the bus to school / play games / watch TV / make the bed / brush teeth / have dinner / have lessons / sleep / have breakfast morning -have a shower -go to school -take the bus to school -make the bed -brush teeth -have lessons -have breakfast. afternoon -do the homework -go home -play games. evening -have a shower -go to bed -watch tv -brush teeth -have dinner -sleep. Self-evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………….............. ................................................................................................................................................................... ------------------------------------------Class: Preparing date: 27/08/2016 Teaching date: …./08/2016. Week: 02 Period: 06. UNIT 1: A DAY IN THE LIFE OF….. - Part E. LANGUAGE FOCUS 1 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: words pronounced /i:/ or /I/, form, use and adverbs of the present simple 2. Skills: Intergrated skills 3. Attitude: It aims to pronounce words containing sounds/i:/ and /I/, and do exercises related to the present simple tense correctly 4. Main points: pronunciation of 2 vowels and grammar point of the present simple 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: get the way how to do tasks. II. Teaching preparation 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk. 2. Preparation of students: textbook, notebook, pen… III. Activities of teaching and learning Content WARM-UP: Which team does each word belong to? PRONOUNCIATION: /I/ - /i:/ sheep ship /i:/ /I/ 1.Presentation: /I/”: short sound, sound of vowels I when I stands before one or two consonants (I + consonant + consonant) Ex:pin /pin/, thing /θiη/ sick /sik/ , idiom / 'idiəm/ /I/: sound of vowels y when y stands at the end of words (city, country, capacity). 2. /i:/: long sound; sound of vowel e when : e + consonant + e Ex: scheme/ski:m/, /i:/ sound of e, ee, ea, ie, ei. (me, bee, peak, thief, ceiling, believe,..) -Ask them to listen and repeat 2.Practice: Textbook. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Teacher’s activities T gives some pairs of words: Tim/ Team, ship/ sheep, hit/ heat, it/ eat, bit/ beat T asks ss to put each word in the correct group. -T helps Ss to distinguish two sounds -Calls on some Ss to pronounce two sounds. 12. Students’ activities Put words in the correct groups Group 1: Tim, ship, hit, bit, it Group 2: team, sheep, heat, eat, beat. Take notes. Competenc es Finding the differences between each group. Knowing some words which are pronounced with /i:/ or /I/. Practice. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(13) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 3.Exercise: Pick out the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the other words. 1. A. field B. heat C. meet D. head 2. A. dinner B. drink C. dive D. children 3. A. ready B. meat C. defeat D. beat Key: 1D, 2C, 3A GRAMMAR Presentation Example: Everyday, I get up at 5.30… I. The present simple tense 1. Form - Statements: I/ You/ We/ They/ plural N + main Verb( S/ES) - Negative: He/ She / It/ Sing. N+ auxiliary verb(DO NOT/ DOES NOT)+ main Verb -Wh-questions: Wh-word+ DO/DOES+ S+ main Verb…? Note: Rules about final V- s/es a. Add “s” to all kinds of verbs b. Add “es” to the verbs with final: ch, sh, x, s, o and z c. Change “y” into”i”and add “es” when verbs ended with “y” and before that by vowels. 2. Use a. express a habit at present (always, usually,often, sometimes, occasionally, seldom, rarely, every…….) Use of Adverbs of Frequency: How often….? Never rarely seldom sometimes often usually always 0% 10% 25% 75% 90% 99% 100% - Other adverbs of frequency: every day/week/month…; once a week/twice a week/ month/ year… Note: the position of adverbs. +As a rule: at the beginning +Usually, sometimes, always.....: stand after TO BE, and before ordinary Verbs ,between an auxiliary V and the main V b. Express the truth, rules E.x: The Sun rises in the East. PRACTICE: Exercise 1: Give the correct tense of verbs. 1. I ………………(eat) my breakfast in the kitchen every day. 2. These boys often ……………(play) football at weekends. 3. It …………………...(rain) in the winter. 4. She ……………………(go) to school three days a week. 5. My little boy often ……………..……(watch) cartoon film. 6. She ……………………..(study) English very well. Expected answers: 1. eat 2. Play 3. rains 4. goes 5 watches 6. studies Exercise 2 : Put adverbs of frequency in appropriate place Expected answer: 1.He usually gets up early 2.She is never late for school. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. pronouncing words and sentences correctlyWrites down exercises on the board T asks sts to answer about their daiy routines -T asks Ss to work in pairs and discuss the form and use of the present simple tense, past tense, - T takes notes on the blackboard. T gives some examples about the positions of adverbs and asks qs I often get up early.. Peer correction Work in pairs to choose the correct word. Being able to find out the words with different sounds. Answer about daily routines…. Sts answer the eliciting questions from T about how to form the present simple ( to be and ordinary verbs). Revising the form, use and adverbs of present simple. -Ask Ss to compare the answers with a friend. - Give feedback Do the excercises -Work individually Work in pairs Write and do the exercises Sts work in pairs to do exercises. Being able to do exercises. -T asks Ss to revise the adverbs of frequency: T writes exercises on the board -T asks Ss to do exercise 2 -Feedback and give suggested. 13. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(14) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 3.Lan sometimes practises speaking English 4. Thao is always a hard -working student. PRODUCTION: Pronunciation: I’m ill because I’ve eaten the eel soup Grammar: Tell about your friend’s daily activities IV. Consolidation and homework: (2 mins). answer Asks ss to translate the sentences. Use present simple to talk about routine. Summarizes the main points of the lesson Asks ss to do more exercises Assign homework. IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences 1. Table of description of competence level. Levels Content Pronunciation of /i:/ and /I/ The present simple. RECOGNITION L1 Words containing sounds /i:/ and /I/ Form of the present simple. APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATION L3 APPLICATION UNDERSTANDING L4 L2 Choosing the word having the Practicing words in Pronouncing underlined part pronounced sentences sounds correctly differently from the others. Choosing the best answers Giving the correct Using the present form of verbs simple to talk about habits, routines. 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises A. Recognition: I.Choose the word having the underlined part pronounced differently from the others. 1. a. little b. fish c. meet d. pig 2. a. interest b. it c. pea d. sit 3. a. simple b. meat c. kick d. hit 4. a. fasten b. sense c. smell d. rest 5. a. niece b. tie c. lie d. die B. Understanding, Low and High application: Practice with these Simple Present exercises: 1. I usually 2. They. (go) to school. (visit) us often.. 3. You. (play) basketball once a week.. 4. Tom. (work) every day.. 5. He always. (tell) us funny stories.. 6. She never. (help) me with that!. 7. Martha and Kevin. (swim) twice a week.. 8. In this club people usually 9. Linda 10. John rarely 11. We. (dance) a lot.. (take care) of her sister. (leave) the country. (live) in the city most of the year.. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 14. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(15) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 12. Lorie 13. I. (travel) to Paris every Sunday. (bake) cookies twice a month.. 14. You always. (teach) me new things.. 15. She (help) the kids of the neighborhood Key: 1 go, 2 visit, 3 play, 4 works, 5 tells, 6 helps, 7 swim, 8 dance, 9 takes care of, 10 leaves, 11 live, 12 travels, 13 bake, 14 teach, 15 helps Ngày 29 tháng 08 năm 2016 TTCM ký duyệt tuần 2. HỨA THỊ HOÀI THANH. Class: Preparing date: 27/08/2016 Teaching date: …./08/2016. Week: 03 Period: 07. UNIT 1: A DAY IN THE LIFE OF….. - Part E. LANGUAGE FOCUS 2 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: Form, use and adverbs of the past simple 2. Skills: Integrated skills 3. Attitude: It aims to do exercises related to the past simple tense correctly 4. Main points: grammar point of the past simple 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: get the way how to do tasks. II. Teaching preparation 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk. 2. Preparation of students: textbook, notebook, pen…. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 15. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(16) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School III. Activities of teaching and learning Content Check- up: Give the correct form of verb 1. He (want) _________ some coffee. 2.. It (rain) _________ every week.. 3.. My parents (be) _________ happy.. 4.. He (sit) _________ in the room.. 5.. My house (be) _________ small.. 6.. This cat (be) _________ black.. 7.. She (go) _________ to school everyday.. 8.. Where _________ she (go) _________ ?. 9.. Where _________ they (go) _________?. 10.. He (have) _________ lunch at eleven.. Teacher’s activities T asks sts about what they did yesterday. From the example, T asks sts to present the form, use and adverbs…. Students’ activities. Competenc es Revising the form of say how to the past form regular simple form or irregular verbs Give examples Revising Ex: - My some father irregular bought this verbs house 10 years ago.. Key: 1wants, 2 rains, 3 are, 4 sits, 5 is, 6 is, 7 goes, 8 does… go, 9 do ..go, 10 has I. Presentation of The Past Simple: Example: I went to the bookshop yesterday. 1. Form - Affirmative: S + V2/ed…. S + was/were…… - Negative: S + did + not + V… S + was/were + not….. - Interrogative: Did + S + V….? Was/Were + S ….? + Regular verbs: V_ ed To start- started, to work- worked + Irregular verbs: to come/came/come; to go/ went/gone; to write/wrote/written 2. Use a. Express an action happening at a certain point of time in the past (yesterday, ago, last……, in the past, in 1990) b. Express a set of action happening in the past.. II. PRACTICE: Exercise 1: Use the Simple Past 1. He ……….…(live) in London last year. 2. They ………..(sell) their house several days ago. 3. When………you …….…..(see) her ? 4. …………..he come to see you last night ? Yes he came. 5. She ……………...(meet) me in the street last Sunday. 6. I………………..(study) music when I was at school. 7. They ………………..(buy) their house last year. 8. They ………………….…(walk) to the corner two days ago. Key: 1. Lived 2. Sold 3. did… see 4. Did 5. met 6.studied 7. Bought 8. walked. T may ask sts to translate some sentences into English by using past simple. Giving the correct form of verbs. T writes down the exercises. Asks sts to work in pairs to do exercises. Do exercises as requested. T offers help and gives feedback. Distinguish the present and past simple tenses. Exercise 2: Give the correct form of the verbs in brackets in two tenses: Simple Present or Simple Past.. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Write down the exercises. 16. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(17) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 1. Mr. Green always (go) _________ to work by bus. 2. It (not rain) ____________in the dry season. 3. They (not go) ____________to the movies last Sunday. 4. My little sister (drink) ___________milk every day. 5. There (be) ___________ a lot of noise at the fair yesterday. 6. They (give) _____________ me the letter a few minutes ago. 7. _____ you (find) ________ my fountain pen yesterday? 8. They often (thank) ____________me for what I do for them. 9. His uncle (teach) __________English in our school five years ago. 10. It (take) _______me 5 minutes to walk to school last year. Key: 1 goes, 2 does not rain, 3 did not go, 4 drinks, 5was, 6 gave, 7 Did… find, 8 thank, 9 taught, 10 took Exercise 3; Task 3 in the textbook III. Production: Talking about your last holiday Consolidation and homework. T asks sts to talk about their last holiday using past simple –. Discuss what they did, where they went Prepare the next lesson. Using past simple in contexts. Summarises the main points of the lessons : use and adverbs) Homework: -Do exercises again - Prepare Unit 2 lesson 1 READING. IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences 1. Table of description of competence level. Levels Content The past simple. RECOGNITION L1 Form, use and adverbs. UNDERSTANDING L2 Choose the best answer. APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATION L3 APPLICATION L4 Give the correct form of verbs. Talk about past events. 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises A. Recognition: Write the past forms of the irregular verbs. Infinitive. Simple Past. 1.. meet. met. 2.. drive. drove. 3.. speak. spoke. 4.. put. 5.. write. w rote. 6.. sing. sang. 7.. do. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. put. did. . . . . . . .. 17. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(18) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 8.. sit. 9.. stand. 10.. run. sat. .. stood. .. ran. .. Write sentences in simple past. 1. Janet / miss / the bus → 2. she / tidy / her room → 3. Nancy / watch / not / television→ 4. she / read / a book → Choose "Was“ or "Were“: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.. The teacher The students But one student We He. nice. very clever. in trouble. sorry for him. nice though.. B. Understanding, Low and High application: Put the verbs into the simple past: w ent. 1. Last year I (go) 2. It (be) 3. I (visit). w as. to England on holiday. fantastic.. visited. lots of interesting places. I (be). 4. In the mornings we (walk) 5. In the evenings we (go) 6. The weather (be). did not rain. 8. But we (see). saw. 9. Where (spend / you) Week 3 Period 8 Date of preparing: Date of teaching :. w ent. w as. 7. It (not / rain). w alked. w as. with two friends of mine .. in the streets of London. to pubs.. strangely fine. a lot. some beautiful rainbows.. did you spend. your last holiday?. 3 / 9/ 2016 /9/20 16 UNIT 2: SCHOOL TALKS - Part A: Reading Allocated time: 45 minutes. I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: Students will be able to know vocabulary items related to their school and related problems. 2. Skills: Integrated skills( mainly Reading skills) - Improve reading skills through guessing words and answering questions. 3. Attitude: It aims to understand more about daily routines of farmers,. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 18. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(19) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 4. Main points: vocabulary about school talks 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: get the way how to do tasks. II. Teaching preparation 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk. 2. Preparation of students: textbook, notebook, pen… III. Activities of teaching and learning Content I. Warm up Brainstorming: SCHOOL . Teachers Students. SCHOOL. Problems at school. playing games. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities - T asks students to - talk about their give a diagram about school school and then describe it.. Competences Ss can find out many things about school. - T leads to the new lesson: unit 2: School Talks. Subjects. II.Pre- reading - Question: When you meet your friend, Which topics do you often talk about? Expected answers: Holidays, hobbies, weather, work and study, entertainment, films, sports and games, films…. - Vocabulary: + international language (n) +corner shop (n): + worry about (v) + hard (a) + narrow (a) /′nærəʊ /# large + tobe far from (exp) + crowded (adj) with : + stuck (a) : + traffic (n) :/′træfɪk / III. While- reading Task 1:Fill each blank with one of the words in the box. There are more words than needed. *Expected answers: 1. enjoy 4. crowed 2. traffic 5. language 3. worry Task 3: Answering questions Expected answers: 1. He studies at Chu Van An High school 2. He studies many subjects such as Math, Physics, Chemistry.. 3. Because it is an international language. 4. She says that teaching is hard work, but she enjoys it because she loves working with children. 5. Because his son has to ride his bike in. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. - T ask sts to discuss the question. - Ss answer the questions. - Calls on some Ss to give their answers. - Gives feedback. Pre-teaches some new words.. - Give their meaning. Reads the words out loud and has students repeat.. -Take notes. - T asks students to study individually. - Have Ss compare the answers with a friend. -T gives feedback. - T ask sts to work in pair, read the passage again and answer the questions. - Sts work in individually, discuss and give the answers.. Sts can able to discuss the topics. Guessing meaning of words in context. Knowing vocabulary about the text. Sts work in pair and answer. - T call on some pairs to read aloud the answers in front of the. 19. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(20) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School narrow and crowed streets on the way to school IV.POST- READING Discuss the question 1. What subjects you like best and why? 2. What do you like or dislike doing at school? 3. What do you worry about at school? Expected answers: 1. I like English best because it is an important means of international communication. - I like learning Math, Chemistry or Vietnamese Literature because it’s useful, interesting. 2. – doing a lot of homework - Taking part in social activities. - Talking with my parents. 3. I worry that many students cheat in exams/live far from school/difficulty in speaking English.. class. - T gives feedback T tells Ss to work in groups : choose one of the following topics and talk about it in 5 minutes. - Go to different groups and offer help if necessary. - Give comments. V. Consolidation and homework:. Summarises the main points of the lesson. - Asks Ss to learn new words and prepare the new lesson.Unit 2: Reading. students work in groups to talk about the questions. Ss are able to improve teamworking: discuss the questions. Listen. IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences 1. Table of description of competence level. Levels Content School Talks. RECOGNITION L1 - vocabulary about School. UNDERSTANDING L2 Task 1: Fill in the blank. APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATION L3 APPLICATION L4 Task 3: Answer the Discuss the questions questions. 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises A. Recognition: Choose the best option A, B or C to complete each sentence. 1.Most girls have a very narrow view of the world, don’t you think? A. limited B. tiny C. small D. poor 2.I study in class 10A with forty-five other students. A. learn B. teach C. instruct D. review 3.We live in a small flat above the corner shop in Tay Son Street. A. younger B. minor C. tiny D. short 4. I study many subjects such as Math, Physics, Chemistry, Biology, Vietnamese Literature, History, Geography etc. A. a lot B. a lot of C. lots D. much 5. Approximately half the people interviewed were in manual occupations. A. career B. profession C. jobs D. all are correct B. Understanding: Use the word in brackets to complete these sentences. languages narrow crowded stuck about 1. Don′t worry about me. I’ll be fine. 2. Can you speak any other languages besides English. 3. The truck could not take that road because it was very narrow 4. Our coach was stuck in a traffic jam and got to Heathrow forty minutes late. 5. The store was crowded with shoppers. C. Low and High application:. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 20. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(21) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Read the passage, then choose the correct answer –a, b. c. or d. The relationship between a teacher and a student can be good or bad, helpful or harmful. Either way, the relationship can affect the students for the rest of his life. In order to have a good teacher-student relationship, it is important that the teacher and the student respect each other. If the teacher is too strict, he frightens the student. The student will not learn well. On the other hand, if the teacher is too friendly and permissive, the student may become lazy and stop working hard. The teacher’s attitude and approach should be between these two extremes. He should encourage the students without forcing or punishing him to learn. He needs patience and understanding. It is part of the teacher’s job to help develop a good positive attitude in his students. As for the student, in order to have a good relationship with his teacher, he must always show his proper respect. He should be eager to learn and willing to work hard. If he learns from the teacher modestly, he will be able to profit fully from his teacher’s knowledge and assistance. 41: The relationship between a teacher and a student is considered very important because it _____. A. can be either good or bad B. it’s very harmful to the student C. makes the student unsafe D. has great influence on the student’s life 42: One of the most important factors for a good teacher-student relationship is the mutual _____. A. responsibility B. respect C. support D. understanding 43: In order to have a good teacher-student relationship, the teacher _____. A. should force the student to learn B. needs patience and understanding C. should be too friendly and permissive D. ought to strict 44: In order to have a good teacher-student relationship, the student _____. A. must be a hard-working person B. must always support the teacher C. must always be a gifted person D. must always be an excellent person 45: According to the passage it’s true that _____. A. the student always profit fully from his teacher B. the student must thank for his teacher’s knowledge and assistance C. the student must always show his proper respect to his teacher D. the teacher himself needs to develop a good positive attitude Self-evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………….............. .................................................................................................................................................................. Week 3, Period 9 Date of preparing: 3 / 9/ 2016 Date of teaching : /9/ 20 16 UNIT 2: SCHOOL TALKS - Part B: Speaking Allocated time: 45 minutes I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: Students will be able to know more about some common expressions in making small talks. - Use vocabulary items related to start and close a conversation. 2. Skills: Integrated skills( mainly speaking skills) - Improve speaking skills through making questions and giving responses in small talks. 3. Attitude: It aims to understand more about starting and closing a conversation 4. Main points: make small talks 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: get the way how to do tasks. II. Teaching preparation 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk. 2. Preparation of students: textbook, notebook, pen…. III. Activities of teaching and learning Content I.Check-up: Questions: 1. What subjects does Phong study at school? 2. What subject does Phong like best?. Teacher’s activities call on Ss to write some vocabularies and answer the questions:. Students’ activities Competences SS have to answer Recalling the questions about previous lesson school talks and give the meaning of new words.. II. Warm up: Jumbled words 1. has, nice, to, you, talking, been, It.. - ask Ss to work in groups and rearrange. -Rearrange 4 sentences. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 21. Sts can put the words in the. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(22) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 2. weekend, Did, nice, have, a, you? 3. up, later, Catch, you, with. 4. school, everything, How, at, is?. III. PRE-SPEAKING Task 1: These expressions are commonly used in making small talks. Place them under the appropriate heading. Then practise it with a partner. Expected answer: Starting Closing - Good morning/Hi - Sorry, I’ve got to go. - How’s everything Talk to you later at school? - Goodbye, See you - Hello, how are you? later. - Hello!What are you - Great.I’ll see you doing? tomorrow. - Hi,how is school? - Catch up with you later. -Well, it’s been nice meeting you IV.WHILE- SPEAKING TASK 2: Rearrange the following sentences to make an appropriate conversation and then practise it with a partner Expected answer: 1.D. 4.H. 7.G. 2.F. 5.E. 8.A. 3.B. 6.C. the jumbled words to make complete sentences - correct and ask Ss to give what is the open or end a conversation. => T leads to new lesson: Today, we will practise speaking conversation having starting and closing conversation.. -T asks Ss to give the expressions to open or end a dialogue. minutes, the group that has the most correct sentences will win the game.. -Sts work in pairs and put the expressions which are commonly used in making small talks under appropriate heading.. Sts are able to know some expressions to start and close a conversation. - ask Ss to work in -Sts practice a pairs to rearrange the conversation sentences to make an appropriate conversation. - calls on some pairs to practise the conversation in front of the class -comment on Ss’ performance and give feedback. Making a conversation. TASK 3: Complete the following conversation with suitable words, phrases or sentences in the box and then practise it with a partner Expected answer: A.......What’s the matter with you ? B........I feel tired.I’ve got headache. A........You’d better go home and have a rest. - ask Ss to work in pairs : Complete the -Sts complete the conversation with conversation and suitable words, phrases practice in pairs or sentences in the box. - calls on some pairs to practise the completed conversation in front of the class.. V.Post- Speaking:. - divide the whole. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. correct order. 22. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(23) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School TASK 4: make small talks on the following topics , using the starting and ending of a conversation Model Topic: Football A: Hi. How are you?. B. I’m fine. Thank you. Did you watch football match last night? A: No, I did not. I had to finish my homework .Is there anything interesting? B:yes. Ronaldo play very well and score a goal. A: Oh, it’s a pity!. B:You can be able to watch the repeated broadcast at 7a.m A:That’s a good idea. I got to go now. See you later. B: Bye.. class into 4 groups and each group chooses one of the following -Represent each topics and discuss it. group 2 sts to talk - + the weather about their topics + last night’s TV programmes + football + plans for next weekend -call on some pairs to practice the conversation in front of the class.. VI. Consolidation and homework: .. T summarises the main points of the lesson T asks sts to make a small talk _Prepare next lesson: Listening. Sts can make a small talk, using the starting and ending of a conersation. Listen. IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences 1. Table of description of competence level. Levels Content. RECOGNITION L1 Some expressions are used in closing and starting a conversation. UNDERSTANDING L2 -Make a conversation - Complete the conversation. APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATION L3 APPLICATION L4. Making Make small talk on questions and the topics giving responses in small talks 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises A. Recognition: 1.Which of these expressions is commonly used when people start a conservation? A. Goodbye. See you later. B. Hello. What are you doing? C. Well, it’s been nice meeting you. D. Great. I’ll see you tomorrow 2. A: Sorry, I’ve got to go. Talk to you later. B: “……………………” A. Hi. How is school? B. Hello. How are you? C. Goodbye! See you later. D. Hello. What are you doing? 3. Lan: “Hello.How are you?” Hoa: “…………………” A. Catch you later. B. Hi. Fine, thanks.And you? C. Nice to see you again. 4.Mary: “Would you like a cup of tea?” 1. Peter: “…………………….” A. No,thanks. B. Sorry,I’ve got to go. C. Catch you later. B. Understanding, Low and High application: Make small talk on the topics Self-evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………….............. ................................................................................................................................................................. Ngày 05 tháng 09 năm 2016 TTCM ký duyệt tuần 3. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 23. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(24) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School HỨA THỊ HOÀI THANH Week 4, Period 10 Date of preparing: 3 / 9/ 2016 Date of teaching : /9/ 20 16 UNIT 2: SCHOOL TALKS- Part C: Listening Allocated time: 45 minutes I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: listen mini conversations about daily topics such as study at school, weather and travelling, words related to the topic 2. Skills: Listening skills - Listen and match the pictures. - Choose the best answer and complete the missing words 3. Attitude: - Actively take part in classroom activities 4. Main points: Listening about study at school, weather, travelling 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: get the way how to do tasks. II. Teaching preparation 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk. 2. Preparation of students: textbook, notebook, pen… III. Activities of teaching and learning Content I.Warm-up Requires Ss to find the questions for the answers 1.I’m taking English. 2.I really like it 3.For two weeks. 4.No,I’m travelling alone Expected answers: 1.What are you taking this semester? 2.Do you like travelling ? 3.How long are you staying there? 4.Are you travelling with your parents ? II. PRE- LISTENING Activity 1: Matching - ask Ss to work in pairs and match a question in A with a response in B. Expected answer: 1C 4B 2E 5D 3A Activity 2: Describing pictures Questions 1. What do you see in the pictures? 2. Who are they ? 3. What are they doing? 4. Can you guess what are they talking about ? * Vocabulary: - semester (n) -Comfortable (a) - Alone -Great( a). Teacher’s activities T asks sts to work in pairs, make the questions for the answers -Calls some pairs to give answers. Competences Speaking skills. T leads to the new lesson: -T requires Ss to work -Sts discuss and do in individuals and then the task work in pairs -walks around for help Ss -checks and gives the right answers - Tell Ss to work in pairs. -Asks sts to give the meaning -Asks them to read. III.WHILE- LISTENING TASK 1: Listen to the conversations and match. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Students’ activities find the questions for the answers. 24. Work in pairs and discuss the questions. Ss see all the details of the pictures clearly. Take notes and repeat. Sts will be able to know the meaning of words and pronounce. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(25) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School them with the pictures Expected answers: Conversation 1:Picture b Conversation 2:Picture c Conversation 3:Picture d Conversation 4:Picture a. -T asks sts to look at the pictures - tell Ss to listen for Listen and give key main ideas and key words words - call on some Ss to explain their answers to class. - feedback and give correct answers.. TASK 2: Listen and choose the correct answer for each sentence below. 1. Lan is taking _________ this semester. a. Maths b. Physics c. Eng lish 2. Lan is in _______ ‘s class a. Miss Huong. B.Miss PHuong.c. Miss Hoa 3. Nam is _______ now a. at school b. at home c. at a party 4. Son plans to stay in Nha Trang for ______. a. a week b. two week b. three week 5. Hoa travels with ______ a. her friend b. herself c. her family Expected answers: Letters in bold Task 3: Conversation Completion Expected answers: 1.it here 4.comfortable 2.very nice 5.travelling 3.big 6.No 7.alone 8.for a drink. IV. POST- LISTENING Discuss the questions: What problems have you got at school? What is / are the reasons ? What have you done to solve it / them? Who helps you to solve it?. V. Consolidation and homework:. -T asks Ss to listen again and choose the best answer -Calls on some sts to give the answer -T gives feedback. - ask Ss to work in pairs and study the conversation. - encourage them to guess the missing words. play the last conversation again. - ask Ss to listen and complete the conversation by filling in the missing information. - comment on Ss’s performance and give correct answers. T asks sts to work in groups -Asks them to discuss the questions -Calls on some sts to tell in front of the class summarises the main ideas of the lesson - assign homework - asks ss to prepare the next part WRITING. -Work in pairs -Listen to the tape and give their answers.. them correctly -Sts are able to listen and give the main ideas. -Improve listening skill. Pair-work .. -Work in groups - discuss the questions Sts are able to develop teamworking Self- study Listen and take notes. IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences 1. Table of description of competence level. Levels Content. RECOGNITION L1. UNDERSTANDING L2. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 25. APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATION L3 APPLICATION L4. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(26) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Listen to four short conversations. Vocabulary about the listening text Match a question with a response. Choose the best answer. Conversation Completion. Discuss the questions. 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises A. Recognition: Work in pairs and answer questions about yourself Questions. Answers. 1. Where do you study?. I study at LHP High School. I’m in class 10C1. 2. Whose class are you in? 3. What subjects are you taking this semester? 4.How long have you learnt English?. I’m taking English I have learnt English for 6 years. B. Understanding, Low and High application: -Talk about the problems you have experienced at school. Self-evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………….............. Week 4, Period 11 Preparing date: 09/09/2016 Teaching date: …./09/2016 UNIT 2: SCHOOL TALKS- Part D. Writing Allocated time: 45 minutes I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - use useful words and structures in some certain forms 2. Skills: Writing skills ( fill some common forms.) 3. Attitude: Actively take part in classroom activities 4. Main points: Fill in a form 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: get the way how to do tasks. II. Teaching preparation 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk. 2. Preparation of students: textbook, notebook, pen… III. Activities of teaching and learning Content I. Check-up: Asking a student to write new words and retell a conversation.. Teacher’s activities Asks sts to write some new words and retell at least a conversation. Students’ activities write some new words and retell. Competences Revising. Sts work in group and discuss some information to fill in the form. Knowing some information. II. Warm up: Brainstorming -Asks sts to list some information to fill in the form What information do you have to fill in the form?. Expected answers: Name, Sex, Job, Place and. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 26. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(27) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School date of birth , Present Address , Marital status , Nationality III. Pre- writing: Task 1:Asking some questions 1. On what occasions do you have to fill in a form? 2. What sorts of information do you often have to provide in a form? Expected answers: 1. To apply for a job. To open accounts. To send or receive money at the post office. To attend to a club. To change school ..etc.. 2. Surname, first name, address ,age, occupation, marital status, telephone number, reason  Vocabulary - form (n): fill in (v): -‘nationality (n): ‘marital ‘status(n): block ‘capital(n): - surname (n):. -Asks sts to answer the questions -Discuss the questions Sts can answer. - Pre-teaches some new words. Sts are able to get to know the meaning of some new words and pronounce them correctly. Take notes IV. While writing Task 2: Forms do not usually ask question, but they ask for information. Match a line in A with a question in B. Expected answer: 1.D 5.B 2.F 6.C 3.E 7.A 4.G Task 3: Forms ask you to do certain things. Do the following 1. Write your name in block capitals. NGUYEN VAN VAN 2. Sign your name: __________________ 3. Delete where not applicable. I am a student/ an employee/ an employer. 4. Put a cross if you are a male. X 5. Put a tick if you are a female. Task 4: Fill in the following form THE OAK TREE SCHOOL OF ENGLISH ENROLMENT FORM PLEASE WRITE IN CAPITAL LETTERS. Mr./ Mrs./ Miss* Surname: LE First name: MINH Date of birth: 17/8/1978 Nationality: Vietnamese Language(s)VietNamese , English Address in your country: 25 Tran Hung DaoGiaLai Occupation: Doctor Reason for learning English: Business/ Pleasure/ Exams/ Others*. (If others, please specify):. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Reads the words out loud and has students repeat.. -Asks sts to do the task Work in pair and do the task. ask Ss to study the form carefully and fill the form using their -work in pairs own information. - call 2 students to fill the form on the blackboard while others doing the task in the textbook. - let them have 4 minutes and then tell. 27. Stle s are able to fill in a form. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(28) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School _________________________ How many hours a day do you want to stay at the school? 10 hours What date do you want to start? : 1/1 * Delete where not applicable. V. Post writing Application form for young learners Please write in capital letter 1.Full name:………………… 2.Gender: Male Female 3. Date of birth:………… 4. Home address:………… 5. Grade:……………………… 6. School:…………………………… 7. Nationality:…………… 8. Telephone:……………………… 9. Name of father:……………………… 10. Name of mother:…………………… 11. Signature:……………… VI Consolidation and homework.. Ss to look at the board and comment on their performance. - correct the form as the whole class. let Ss write in 3 minutes and T goes around to help if necessary. - peer correction - Give feedback Work in pair, ask and answer the questions to fill in a form Ss are able to improve their pair-working skill; - write a form to apply for a job. Summarises the main points of the lessons Asks sts to learn by heart vocabulary ,write in a form. Listen Self study IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences 1. Table of description of competence level. Levels Content Fill in a form. RECOGNITION L1 Some information to fill in a form. UNDERSTANDING L2 Match some information in a form. APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATION L3 APPLICATION L4 Fill in a form write a form to apply for a job. 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises A. Recognition: Sort of information in a form? Expected answers: Name , Gender (sex), home telephone, occupation, place of birth…. B. Understanding, Low and High application: You want to apply to go on a study holiday. Fill in the form that follow: International study holidays……………………………….. Family name:………………………….. First name:…………………………….. Present address:………………………… Date of birth:…………………………… Nationality:…………………………….. Occupation:………………………… Why are you applying for a study holiday?.................................. What languages can you speak?............................................ How will you be traveling?................................................... Signature:…………………………………………….. Self-evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………….............. .............................................................................................................................................................. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 28. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(29) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School. Week 4, Period 12 Preparing date: 10/09/2016. Teaching date: …./09/2016. UNIT 2: SCHOOL TALKS….. - Part E. LANGUAGE FOCUS 1 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: words pronounced /^/ and /a:/ correctly, form, make questions with Wh-words 2. Skills: Integrated skills 3. Attitude: It aims to pronounce words containing sounds/^/ and /a:/, and do exercises with wh- words 4. Main points: pronunciation of 2 vowels and grammar point of wh- words 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: get the way how to do tasks. II. Teaching preparation 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk. 2. Preparation of students: textbook, notebook, pen… III. Activities of teaching and learning Content I.WARM-UP: - show 2 pictures and ask Ss : What do you see in these pictures?. Expected answers: 1. It’s a shark. 2. The heart symbolizes the love. II. PRONOUNCIATION 1. Example: love shark /^/ /a:/. - help Ss to distinguish two sounds. /^/ + o: wonderful, son, month, some, something + u: bus, fun, husband, cut, duck, button + oo: blood, flood +ou: country, couple, young,enough, trouble, touch. / a: / + ar: farm, far, alarm, start, star, hard.. + a+ p, b, d: habit, rapid, establish, pocket. Teacher’s activities T gives 2 pictures T asks ss to answer. Students’ activities Look at the pictures and answer. -T helps Ss to distinguish two sounds -Calls on some Ss to pronounce two sounds. Competences Finding the name of the pictures. Knowing some words which are pronounced with /^/ , /a:/ Take notes. + au: laugh, aunt. 2.Practice: Textbook 3.Exercise: Pick out the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the other words. 1. a. far b. marvelous c. star d. match 2. a. hat b. father c. bank d. sang. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Ask them to listen and repeat - call on some Ss to pronounce two sounds. - peer correction. 29. Practice pronouncing words and sentences correctly-. Being able to find out the words with different sounds. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(30) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 3. a. full b. lunch c. study d. Sunday 4. a. subject b. just c. put d. discuss Expected answers: 1. d 2. b 3. a 4. c GRAMMAR 1.Presentation:WH- QUESTIONS - ask Ss to list some Wh-words Expected answers: Who, Where, What, When, Why, Which, How, whom…. Form: With “to be”: Wh- + be + S (+ …)? Ex: How are you?, What’s your name? With auxiliary verbs: Wh- + do/does/did + S + V (+…)? Ex: Where do you live? With modal verbs: Wh- + modal verbs + S + V (+ …)? Ex: what can you see in the picture? With perfect tense: Wh- + have/has/had + S + V3 (+ …)? Ex: How long have you been here? 2.PRACTICE: Exercise 1: Choose the best answer. 1. ------- are you from? China a. Where b. Who c. Which d. When 2. --------- have you studied English? For 10 years a. How long b. How c. Where d. Who 3. ------- is your father? He’s forty- five a. How old b. How c. What d. How far 4. -------- is it from your house to school? 2 kilometers a. How b. How far c. Where d. How many 5. -------is it? It’s seven o’clock a. What time b. When c. Which d. How 6. -------- people are there in your family? There are 6 people a. How much b. How c. How many d. Which 7. ------- were you absent yesterday? Because I was sick. a. What b. Why c. Who d. When 8. -------- made that cake? Tom a. When b. Who c. Which d. How Expected answers: Letters in bold Exercise 2 : Make questions for the following responses ( textbook) Expected answers: 1. When did you come here? 2. How long did you study there? 3. Who did you come with? 4. Where did you live? 5. Why do you learn E? 6. What time is it? 7. How many children have they got? 3.PRODUCTION -Ask sts to make 3 questions IV. Consolidation and homework: (2 mins). Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. -Asks sts choose the different sound. - give feedback Peer correction Work in pairs - ask Ss to list some to choose the Wh-words correct word : T writes exercises on the board -T asks Ss to do exercise 2 -Feedback and give suggested answer. Sts can list some Whquestion words. Ask sts to do the exercise 1 -call on some sts to answer and give feedback Sts work in pairs to do exercises. -Asks sts to make questions -calls on some pairs to read their answers in front of the class. correct and give -work in pair feedback and write questions. Ss are able to improve their pair-working skill: do exercises. Have sts to make some questions. Summarizes the mai points of the lesson Asks ss to do more. 30. -Sts work in groups of 4 and make qh-. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(31) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School exercises Assign homework. questions Listen. Self study. IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences 1. Table of description of competence level. Levels Content Pronunciation of /^/ and /a:/ The present simple. RECOGNITION L1 Words containing sounds /^/ and a:I/ Form of whquestions. APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATION L3 APPLICATION UNDERSTANDING L4 L2 Choosing the word having the Make questions Pronouncing underlined part pronounced sounds correctly differently from the others. Choosing the best answers. 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises A. Recognition: I.Choose the word having the underlined part pronounced differently from the others. 1. A. marvel B. package C. father D. lastly 2. A. address B. important C. master D. embarrass 3. A. alarm B. affair C. buffalo D. passenger 4. A. office B. drop C. tobacco D. plot B.Understanding, Low and High application Make the questions for the following sentences. 1. I can speak three languages. à How many languages can you speak? 2. She goes to school by bus. à How does she go to school? 3. My mother visited Ha Long Bay last summer holiday. à When did your mother visit Ha Long Bay? 4. My grandfather listens to the radio 3 times a week. à How often does your grandfather listen to the radio? Ngày 12 tháng 09 năm 2016 TTCM ký duyệt tuần 4. HỨA THỊ HOÀI THANH Week 5, Period 13 Preparing date: 17/09/2016 Teaching date: …./09/2016 UNIT 2: SCHOOL TALKS….. - Part E. LANGUAGE FOCUS 2 GERUND AND TO + INFINITVE I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - distinguish the use of Gerund and To-infinitive 2. Skills: Integrated skills 3. Attitude: do exercises with gerund and to + infinitive 4. Main points: grammar point of gerund and to + infinitive 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: get the way how to do tasks. II. Teaching preparation. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 31. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(32) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk. 2. Preparation of students: textbook, notebook, pen… III. Activities of teaching and learning Content I.WARM-UP: Read the text about Wilson & answer some questions Wilson is studying marketing at university. She enjoys travelling and would probably like to work for a tour company. . After university, I’m going to have a year off and I’m going round the world with another girl. 1. What does she enjoy doing? 2. What does she plan to do after university? Expected answers: 1.She enjoys travelling V-ing 2.She plans to have a year off and go round the to+ V world with another girl. II.GRAMMAR 1.To + Infinitive Some verbs followed by V+ to-infinitive afford, decide, intend, pretend, want, agree, expect, manage, , learn, , manage, mean, plan, prepare, promise, propose, seem, tend, want,wish, attempt advise, expect, order, teach, would like, … Adj + to - infinitive Too+ adj + to – infinitive Adj + enough + to V + It’s adj + to … + be delighted to/be willing to/ be eager to/ be glad to … + After Wh-words : what , how , which , where… ( except why) Ex: I don’t know what to say. + After indefinite pronouns: anyone/ anybody… 1. Gerund ( V-ing) +. Some verbs followed by V-ing Admit,- avoid,- consider,- delay,- deny,- detest,encourage,- fancy,- finish,- hate,imagine,- involve,mention,- mind,- miss,- postpone,- practice,- quit,risk- suggest …………. + Follow, idioms It is no use: không có ích - It is no good: không tốt - waste / spend: lãng phí, bỏ ra (thời gian, tiền bạc) - have difficulty / trouble: gặp khó khăn/trở ngại - can’t help: không thể không - can’t stand / can’t bear: không chịu đựng nỗi - feel like: cảm thấy thích - look forward to: mong chờ, mong đợi It is (not) worth: đáng / không đáng + After Preposition: in, on at, with…… III. PRACTICE Exercise 1:Fill each blank with an –ing or to+ inf. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Teacher’s activities T gives a passage and asks sts to answer. Students’ activities Read the text and answer. Competen ces Sts are able to read and answer questions. -calls on some sts to answer - underlines v-ing and to +v and leads to the new lesson. -Give some common verbs which are usually followed by a to –infinitive - Give some structures about to +V. Take notes and list. Ask them to give some common verbs are usually followed by ving. Sts can list some Some verbs followed by V-ing. 32. Knowing some verbs can be followed by to + V/ gerund. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(33) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Expected answers: 1. to hear 2. going 3. remembering 4. doing 5. worrying 6. to pay 7. to go 8. visiting 9.seeing 10.hearing Exercise 2: Complete the following sentences using an –Ing or to+ v Expected answers: 1. to go 2. waiting 3. having 4. find 7. to call 8. to lend 9. talking 10. to post. -Asks sts to do exercise - call on some sts to answer - give feedback. IV.PRODUCTION Exercise 3: Put the verbs into the correct form 1. I was very tired. I tried ........................ my eyes open but I couldn’t.(keep) 2. She told him ............................... the door. (lock) 3. My father allowed me ................. his camera. (use) 4. I want ................................ the truth. (know) 5. When I was tired, I enjoy ......................television. It’s relaxing.(watch) 6. It was a nice day, so we decided .......... for a picnic. (go) 7. I’m not in a hurry. I don’t mind .................... (wait) 8. We were hungry, so I suggested .......... dinner early. (have) Expected answers: 1.to keep 2. to lock 3. to use 4. to know 5. watching 6. to go 7.waiting 8. having IV. Consolidation and homework. -Asks sts to put the correct verbs in brackets. -calls on some sts to read their answers in -Work in pair and front of the class. discuss the -correct and give answers feedback. Sts work in pairs to do exercises Ss are able to improve their pairworking skill: do exercises. Listen Summarizes the mai points of the lesson Asks ss to do more exercises Assign homework. Self study. IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences 1. Table of description of competence level. Levels Content Grammar: To + V, Gerund. RECOGNITION L1 Form of to +v, V-ing. UNDERSTANDING L2 - Sts can understand some structures about to +inf, V-ing. 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises A. Recognition: Choose the best answer. 1. I enjoy _________ alone. a. be b. to be c. being 2. Would you like _______to the party?. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. APPLICATION LOW- APPLICATION HighL3 APPLICATION L4 Exercise1:Fill each blank with an –ing or to+ inf Exercise 3: Put Exercise 2: Complete the the verbs into the following sentences using correct form an –Ing or to+ v. d. to have been. 33. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(34) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School a. to come b. come c. coming d. to have come 3. Do you mind_______ such a long way to work every day? a. to travel b. travel c. to have travelled d. travelling 4. I don’t like that house. I would hate _______there. a. live b. living c. to live d. to have lived 5. We tried _______the fire out but we were unsuccessful. We had to call the fire- brigade. a. putting b. put c. to put d. to have put 6. It’s no use ______ those things. a. buy b. buying c. to buy d. to be bought B.Understanding, Low and High application Put the words in the correct order: 1. who / something / eat / want ->Who wants something to eat? 2. delighted / hear / I / be / the news. ->I am / was delighted to hear the news. 3. Nam/ looking forward/ be/ hearing/ you/ from. -> Nam is looking forward to hearing from you.. Week 5 Period 14 Date of preparing:. 15 / 9/ 2016. Date of teaching. /9/20 16. Unit 3: PEOPLE’S BACKGROUND Lesson 1: READING – period 1 Allocated time: 45 minutes I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: Reading a passage about general ideas and specific information about Marie Curie 2. Skills: Integrated skills ( mainly Reading skills) 3. Attitude: It aims to help students know more about the background of a scientist. 4. Main points: vocabulary comprehension, and passage comprehension 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: broadening vocabulary about the topic and improving reading skills through tasks II. Teaching preparation 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk, handouts 2. Preparation of students: textbook, notebook, pen… III. Activities of teaching and learning Content Check- up: do exercises in handouts Choose the best option 1. A. far B. marvelous C. star D. match 2. A. subject B. just C. put D. discuss 3. ________does she want to learn English? - Because it's an international language. A. Where B. How C. What D. Why 4. __________ do you do? – I’m a student. A. What B. Where C. WhoD. When 5. _______is she going to? – She is going to school. A. Where B. Which C. Who D. When 6. ______are you talking to? – I’m talking to my mother. A. Who B. Why C. What D. Where Make questions from the underlined words or phrases:. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities - T distributes/writes Do the exercises down the exercise for checking up the previous lesson. T goes around to check if sts can complete the exercise Expected questions: - Who teaches English at a high school. - How does he go to school?. 34. Compete nces Finding the words with different pronuncia tion Rememb ering whquestions. - Give their answers.. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(35) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 1.Miss Phuong teaches English at a high school. 2.He goes to school by bike. 3. Phong studies at Chu Van An High School. 4. We went to Lan’s birthday party last week. 5. Miss Phuong loves teaching because she loves working with children. 6. Mr Vy often gets up at 4:30. I. Pre-reading:(15 mins) Activity 1: Answering questions 1. Have you ever heard of Marie Curie(MC)? 2. What do you know about her ? - to know more about MC, today we are going to learn about People’s background. Activity 2:Presenting Vocabulary + background [’bækgraʊnd] (n) lai lịch + brilliant(a):clever, quick at learning + mature [mə’tjʊə](a) trưởng thành + harbour( v)[’hɑ: bə] ấp ủ, nung nấu + to interrupt [intə’rʌpt]: (v) gián đoạn + to be awarded: trao giải + determine [di’tɜ: min](v) định, xác định, định rõ + ease[i:z](v) giảm bớt + Strong-willed ý chí mạnh mẽ + Ambitious[æm’bi∫əs]: có nhiều hoài bão + Intelligent : thông minh + humane: nhân đạo + Hard- working: chăm chỉ Activity 3: Matching Match the words or phrase in A with their meaning in B Key: 1c, 2e, 3a, 4d, 5b II. While-reading:(15 mins) Activity : Answer the questions 1. When and where was Marie Curie born? 2. What kind of student was she? 3. Why did she work as a private tutor? Expected answer: 1. MC was born in Warsaw on November 7th, 1867. 2. She was a brilliant and mature student. 3. She worked as a private tutor to save money for a study tour abroad. III. Post-reading:( 5 mins): Present some information about Marie curie: date, place of birth, education IV. Consolidation and homework:(2 mins) - new words - some information about the MC’s background. Where does Phong study? When did you go to Lan’s birthday party? Why does Miss Phuong love teaching? What time does Mr Vy often get up?. T asks questions and provides some cues T can provide names of 4 scientists and asks sts to odd one out T asks sts to provide some information about Marie curie T may lead to the lesson. Sts name some scientists Brainstorm about MC: date/ place of birth, family, education, job, career…. T helps Ss to explain some new words and phrases T writes new words while asking students to read, pronounce words correctly and asks sts to repeat.. Answer eliciting questions from the T Write down on the notebooks. Knowing the meaning, spelling and pronuncia tion of new words. .. T explains the task and asks sts to complete T writes questions on the board and asks sts to read the 1st and 2nd passage to answer 3 questions. T asks sts to represent some information about Marie curie: date, place of birth, education Summarises the main points of the lesson. Asks Ss to learn new words and prepare the new lesson.. Listen to the guides and match the words with their meanings Sts read the passage and answer qs. Knowing the meaning of words Improvin g reading comprehe nsion. Present the talk. Presentin g a topic. listen. Selfstudy. IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 35. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(36) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 1. Table of description of competence level. Levels Content Reading about MC’s background (1). RECOGNITION L1 Recognizing the meaning, spelling and pronunciation of new words. UNDERSTANDING L2 Understanding new words to use the appropriately( matching words with meanings). APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATION L3 APPLICATION L4 Answering questions Presenting about MC’s background. 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises A. Recognition and B. Understanding: Choose the best answer. 1. When I was young, I received some ……..training from my father. A. science B. scientific C. scientist D. scientifically 2. We must send ………….aid to the refugees. A. human B. humanism C. humane D. humanitarian 3. Nowadays, more and more young people want to have a university …… . A. educate B. education C. educator D. educational 4. The purpose of the test is to ………. the weight of the chemical element. A. ease B. interrupt C. determine D. receive 5. In the 19th century, it was ………… for a woman to become a doctor. A. can’t B. impossible C. couldn’t D. incapable 6. He took …………the position that his father had obtained at the college. A. on B. to C. up D. in 7. Tran Hieu Ngan was the first Vietnamese athlete ….. an Olympic medal. A. to win B. winning C. won D. had won 8. After the … death of her husband, Marie Curie took up his position at the Sorbonne. A. tragic B. tragedy C. tragical D. tragically 9. Marie Curie was …......…..the Nobel Prize in chemistry for determining the atomic weight of radium. A. won B. awarded C. dedicated D. devoted 10. Marie Curie was born ____________ November 7, 1867. A. in B. from C. at D. on C. Low and High application: Present some information about Marie curie: date, place of birth, education. Week 5 Period 15 Date of preparing:. 15 / 9/ 2016. Date of teaching. /9/20 16. Unit 3: PEOPLE’S BACKGROUND Lesson 1: READING – period 2 Allocated time: 45 minutes I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: Reading about the life and achievements of Marie Curie 2. Skills: Integrated skills( mainly Reading skills) 3. Attitude: It aims to help sts broaden vocabulary and reading skills, teach sts about the life of a great scientist so that students can be motivated to overcome their difficulties to study harder 4. Main points: vocabulary comprehension, deciding on True or False statements and answering questions. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 36. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(37) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: get the way how to do tasks. II. Teaching preparation 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk. 2. Preparation of students: textbook, notebook, pen… III. Activities of teaching and learning Content I.Check up (7 mins) Vocabulary and questions about MC I. Pre-reading:(15 mins) Questions: - Were her living conditions easy? - What was the first degree that she earned? Physics/Chemistry/ Mathematics - How old was she when she got married? Expected answer: - No, they weren’t. - Physics - 28 years old II. While-reading:(15 mins) Task 1: TRUE or FALSE Expected answer: 1.T 2.F (Her dream was to become a scientist) 3.T 4. F (She married Pierre Curie in 1895) 5. T. Task 2:Answering questions: Q4,5 4. She was awarded a Nobel Prize in Chemistry for determining the atomic weight of radium. 5. No, it wasn’t. Her real joy was “easing human suffering”. III. Post-reading:( 5 mins) Find the events for each of the following years. Then use them to summarize Marie Curie’s Background. 1867 born/ Marie’s birthday 1891 studied at Sorbonne 1895 got married 1903 received doctor of Philosophy 1911 got Nobel prize in Chemistry 1914 founded the radium Institute. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities - T asks students to The whole class write write 10 new words new words on papers and answer 3 questions 3 sts answer qs. Competences Reviewing vocabulary. Work in pairs. Answer questions T asks questions passage. sts some about the. T lets Ss read the passage more carefully and decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F).Correct the false information. T asks Ss to highlight or underline the information in the passage then helps Ss find the correct answers. Provides feedback and give correct answers:. Read the passage more carefully and decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F).Correct the false information.. Practicing deciding on T/ F statements. Work in pairs to answer the questions.. Finding answers for questions. Work in groups: Present the summary of Marie Curie’s Background. Summarizing the main ideas. T asks Ss to do the task in pairs to answer the questions. Tell Ss to compare their answers with other pairs. Let them discuss and correct for one another. Feedback and give correct answers T explains the task. 37. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(38) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 1934. died in Savoy, France. IV. Consolidation and homework:(2 mins) Write a short passage about 100 words about Marie Curie. - Prepare Unit 3 lesson 2 SPEAKING. T presents the requirements for sts to r etell the background about Marie Curie. Retell the background about Marie Curie Write a short passage about 100 words about Marie Curie. - Prepare Unit 3 lesson 2 SPEAKING. Looking back what they’ve learnt. IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences 1. Table of description of competence level. Levels Content Reading 2. RECOGNITION L1 Recalling vocabulary. UNDERSTANDING L2 Deciding on T/ F statements. APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATION L3 APPLICATION L4 Answering questions Representing main milestones in life of MC. 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises A. Recognition and B. Understanding: Give the correct form of word: 1. Louis Pasteur is a world-famous French _________________. (chemistry) 2. ________________ around the world are looking for a better human life. (Science) 3. There are now a lot of students without jobs after _____________. (graduate) 4. They need a leader with courage and _____________. (determine) 5. Bad planning always leads to ____________ later. (difficult) 6. Researchers have already made some important ____________. (discover) 7. The (found) __________of the Institute of Radium in 1914 made her humanitarian wish come true. 8. After the tragic (die)________ of Pierre Curie, she became the first woman in France to be a university professor. 9. Elizabeth Blackwell was an (ambition) _______ girl. She was determined to be a doctor at any cost. 10. If Helen is concerned about her (appear) ____________, she will look pretty. Key: 1 chemist, 2 Scientists, 3 graduation, 4 determination,5 difficulties, 6 discoveries, 7 foundation, 8 death, 9 ambitious, 10 appearance. C. Low and High application: Choose the correct word or phrase to fill in the blank: Barbara, who is a writer, is married with two ___1____ . She has written over 40 books. She started ___2___ after the tragic death of her first husband. She has lived in many ___3___ of the world, including Japan and India. She ____4__ her childhood in Egypt, but came to England __5__ 1966. She has written ___6___ prose and poetry, but is best known for her romantic novels. She ___7___ many awards, including the Booker Prize which she ___8___ in 1988 for the novel “ Dark times to Come”. 1. A. childs B. children C.boy D. woman 2. A .writing B. wrote C. has written D. write 3. A .where B. villages C. city D. regions 4. A .spends B. has spent C. spent D. spending 5. A .on B. in C. at D. of 6. A .as well B. too C. also D. both 7. A. has won B. won C. wins D. winning 8. A. won B. has won C. have won D. had won Ngày 19 tháng 09 năm 2016 TTCM ký duyệt tuần 5. HỨA THỊ HOÀI THANH. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 38. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(39) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School. Week 6 Period 16 Date of preparing:. 15 / 9/ 2016. Date of teaching. /9/20 16. Unit 3: PEOPLE’S BACKGROUND Lesson 3: SPEAKING Allocated time: 45 minutes I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: some useful information to ask and answer about people’s background 2. Skills: Integrated skills( mainly Speaking skills) 3. Attitude: It aims to practice asking and answering about people’s background, students can act out conversations 4. Main points: items to tell about someone’s background: family, education, experience 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: get the way how to make an interview about background II. Teaching preparation 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk. 2. Preparation of students: textbook, notebook, pen… III. Activities of teaching and learning Content Check-up: 15 minute- test I. Warm up (7 mins) Jumbled word: INTERVIEW. I. Pre-speaking:(15 mins) TASK 1: Exploiting the term Question: Which items can tell somebody’s background?  Family  Education  Experience Matching the topics with suitable questions. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Teacher’s activities T asks a student to do the test within 15ms. Students’ activities Do tests by themselves. T writes: WIENITRVE Asks tst to rearrange these letters to find the key word T: Now we practise acting out an interview.. Find the correct words from the jumbled letters. T asks Ss to work in pairs and decide which items can tell somebody’s background. Encourages Ss to discuss the items and. Discuss the items and choose the appropriate ones.. 39. Competences Reviewing old lessons. Getting to know the topic: Making an interview. Deciding the suitable items. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(40) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School  Family +How many people are there in your family? +What does your father do?  Education +Where did you study at high school ? +What subjects do you like best? +What degree do you have?  Experience +How long have you worked as a doctor/ teacher.......? +What experience do you have? II. While-Speaking:(15 mins) Sample interview: A: Good afternoon. I’d like to know about your friend who has just won a scholarship. B: Good afternoon. That’s right. Ask me your questions A: Where and when was he born? B: He was born in 2001 in Gia Lai A: Where does he live? B: He lives with his parents in Dak Doa A: What do his parents do? B: They are teachers. A: how many brothers/sisters does he have? What do they do? How old are they? B: He has a six- year- old sister. She is a primary pupil. A: which primary school/secondary school did he go to? B: He studied at Dak doa primary and VTS secondary school A:What’s his favourite subject? B: He likes Maths A: Thank you for your information. choose the appropriate ones. Ask Ss to discuss the questions that can be used to get information for each item.. discuss the questions that can be used to get information for each item.. Knowing how to use questions to make an interview. T introduces sample interview and asks sts to play 2 roles in the conversation. Ss should study the items of information carefully and find the questions for each item... Guessing meaning of words in context. T helps sts pronounce correctly. Work in pairs to act out the interview. Asking and answering questions. III. Post-speaking:( 5 mins) TASK 3: Report an interview Ss can begin : The person I have interviewed is Lan. She was born in 2001 in Hanoi.There are five members in her family........... T asks Ss to work in groups and talk about the person they have known through the interview. Calls on some Ss to give a small talk in front of the class. Comments on Ss’s performance and make necessary corrections.. Present the talk. Presenting a topic. IV. Consolidation and homework:(2 mins). Summarises the main points of the lesson. - Asks Ss to learn new words and prepare the new lesson.. IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences 1. Table of description of competence level. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 40. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(41) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Levels Content Speaking. RECOGNITION L1 Recognizing items used to ask about background. UNDERSTANDING L2 Making questions to make interviews. APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATION L3 APPLICATION L4 Acting out the Reporting the results dialogue in pairs. 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises A. Recognition: Which items can tell somebody’s background?  Family  Education  Experience B. Understanding: Matching the topics with suitable questions  Family +How many people are there in your family? +What does your father do?  Education +Where did you study at high school ? +What subjects do you like best? +What degree do you have?  Experience +How long have you worked as a doctor/ teacher.......? +What experience do you have? C. Low and High application: Report an interview MA TRẬN ĐỀ KIỂM TRA 15 PHÚT SỐ 01 HKI- năm học 2016-2017 MÔN TIẾNG ANH LỚP 10 (Chương trình CHUẨN). Thời gian làm bài: 15 phút (12 câu trắc nghiệm+ 4 câu Tư luận MULTIPLE CHOICE 0.5 *12= 6. Part/section/ Q.no. Test items. Question levels Re. Phonetics 1. Lexis 2. Grammar. WRITTEN FORM 1.0*4= 4. Writing. + Sound: */ I/and/i: /,*/ :/ and /a,/ + stress ( words from unit 1 and 2). x 2x. + present simple + past simple + Wh- questions + gerund or infinitive + Make questions for the underlined words + Rearrange jumbled words. Total mark 16 câu = 10 điểm Percentage %. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. App. 3x. + Vocabulary of unit 1,2. SỞ GIÁO DỤC VÀ ĐÀO TẠO GIA LAI TRƯỜNG THPT LÊ HỒNG PHONG. Un. x. x x. x. x. x 2x 2x. 5. 6. 5. 30%. 40%. 30%. ĐỀ KIỂM TRA 15 PHÚT SỐ 01 HKI- năm học 2016-2017 MÔN TIẾNG ANH LỚP 10 - CTC Thời gian làm bài: 15 phút. 41. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(42) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School (12 câu trắc nghiệm+ 4 câu Tự luận) Name…………………………………. Class: 10C…. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently. 1. A. target B. arrive C. part D. march 2.. A. field. B. heat. C. meet. D. head. Choose the word whose main stress pattern is not the same as that of the others. 3. A. tobacco B. several C. children D. breakfast Mark the letter A, B, C or D to indicate the correct option to fill each of the following blanks. 4. _________ does he want to study English? - Because it is an international language. A. Who B. How C. What D. Why 5. Would you like _________ somewhere for a drink? A. go B. to going C. going D. to go 6. _________ do you study? - I study at Chu Van An High School. A. When B. Who C. Where D. How 7. I was late for school this morning because my alarm clock didn’t ________. A. go off B. go up C. go away 8. I’m not in a hurry. I don’t mind ____________. A. wait B. waiting C. to wait 9. Marie Curie was born ____________ November 7, 1867. A. in B. from C. at 10. Jane graduated from Paris medical school with flying colours A. with difficulty B. with very high grades C. without success Choose the underlined part that needs correcting. 11. Yesterday, she had breakfast at 8.30, then she goes to work immediately. A B C D 12. Lan was in a difficult situation, so I agreed lending her some money. A B C D. D. go on D. waited D. on D. due to her hard work. Make question for the underlined parts 1. My sister goes to school by bike every day.  How does your sister go to school? 2. We went to Lan’s birthday party last week. When did you go to Lan’s birthday? Rearrange these words to make correct sentences 1. children / household / young / with / tasks /enjoy/ helping ///  Young children enjoy helping with household tasks 2. high / aunt / teaches / a / my / English / at /school //.  My aunt teaches English at a high school Week 6 Period 17 Date of preparing:. 23 / 9/ 2016. Date of teaching. /9/20 16. Unit 3: PEOPLE’S BACKGROUND Lesson 4: LISTENING Allocated time: 45 minutes I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: Helping students to listen for specific information about Olympic Champion 2. Skills: Integrated skills( mainly Speaking skills) 3. Attitude: It aims to practise listening skills through completing some listening tasks: Deciding on True/ False statements and Filling gaps 4. Main points: vocabulary about the Olympic Champion and listening tasks. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 42. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(43) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: get the way how to do tasks.(listening tasks) II. Teaching preparation 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk. 2. Preparation of students: textbook, notebook, pen… III. Activities of teaching and learning Content Check-up: Asking 2 students to make an interview about their backgrounds. I. Warm up (7 mins). Teacher’s activities T asks sts to make an interview. Students’ activities Some pairs make interview. Competences Making interviews about background. work in pairs to answer questions. Getting to know about Olympic champion:. Answering Questions T gives a picture about Olympic Champions and asks Ss to work in pairs and talk about them.. Mr. Hoang Xuan Vinh- shooting I. Pre-listening:(15 mins) Activity 1:Presenting Vocabulary +Olympic Champion  championship ( translation) + sports teacher: a teacher who teaches sports( definition) + Diploma (n) chứng chỉ, văn bằng (object) + teacher’s diploma: bằng sư phạm + romantic (adj) lãng mạn  romance + Degree: bằng cấp + Certificate: giấy chứng nhận + not only…but also= both..and Activity 2:Listening and repeating Activity 3: Checking: Rub and remember II. While-listening:(15 mins) TASK 1: TRUE Or FALSE. -Expected answer: 1.T(born in 1985, when she was 15) 2. T 3. F( She doesn’t have much free time) 4. T 5. F( She wants to be a sports teacher). Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. T writes down new Take notes and give words and asks sts to the V equivalents give V equivalents. T pronounces correctly. words Sts listen and repeat in chorus. Knowing some vocabulary about the Olympic champion. Pronouncing words correctly. T asks sts to say the meaning of words again T asks Ss to listen to the conversation between Bob and Sally. Decide whether the statements are true or false. Before listening to the tape, T asks Ss to read all statements and understand clearly. Encourages Ss to guess the statements if they are T or F Has Ss compare their answers with a friend. 43. Read all statements and understand clearly.. Practice listening skills through Guess the statements if guessing and they are T or F listening to decide to T listen to the or F conversation statements Work individually Compare their answers with a friend. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(44) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Feedback and give correct answers:. some Ss explain their answers. Task 2: GAP- FILLING T asks Ss to read the sentences carefully and try to guess the missing words in the blanks. T plays the tape once T provides feedback and gives correct answers:. -Expected answer: 1. a general education 2. lives - family 3. different - swimming 4. loves stories 5. teacher’s diploma.. III. Post-Listening:( 5 mins) Suggested questions: 1. Who is Sally? 2. When was she born? 3. What has she got at local school? 4. What did she do when she was 15? 5. Where is her house? 6. How many members are there in her family? Who are they? 7. What does she like to do in her free time? IV. Consolidation and homework:(2 mins). Read the sentences carefully and try to guess the missing words in the blanks.. Practicing guessing the words in blanks and listening to fill in correctly. Ss listen to the conversation again and fill in the blanks.. T ask Ss to work in pairs :Ask and answer about Sally. Present the talk Sally is an Olympic champion. She was born in 1985….. Presenting a topic. Summarises the main points of the lesson. - Asks Ss to learn new words and prepare the new lesson.. Remember to do what the teacher asked. Self- study. IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences 1. Table of description of competence level Levels Content Listening. RECOGNITION L1 Recognizing words about the topic. UNDERSTANDING L2 Deciding on True or False statements. 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises A. Recognition: Matching the words in A with their meaning in B A B 1. Champion a.bằng sư phạm 2. sports teacher: b. chứng chỉ, văn bằng 3. Diploma c. nhà vô địch 4. teacher’s diploma d. lãng mạn 5. romantic e. bằng cấp 6. Degree: f. giấy chứng nhận 7. Certificate: g. giáo viên thể dục Key: 1c 2g 3b 4 a 5d 6 e 7 f B. Understanding: 1. Sally was born in__________. A. 1995 B. 1985 2. There are_______ people in her family. A. Four B. Five 3. She likes both__________ and_________ A. Sports/ speaking 4. She wants to be a________ . A worker B. Doctor C. Low and High application: Present about Sally’s background Tapescript:. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 44. APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATION L3 APPLICATION L4 Answering questions Reporting about about Sally ( making Sally a conversation). C. 1895 C. Six B. Sports/ reading C. teacher. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(45) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Bob: Congratulations! You are now the Olympic champion. Sally: Thank. Yes, I’m very happy. Bob: Our readers want to know all about you. Sally: That’s nice! Well, ask me your questions. Bob: First of all, tell me something about yourself. Sally: Well, I was born in 1980. I got a general education at local school and when I was 15, I joined the Star Sports Club near my home. Bob: Where is your home? Sally: In Manchester. Bob: I see. And do you live alone? Sally: No. I live with my family, my parents and two brothers. Bob: What do you like to do in your free time? Sally: Well, I don’t have much free time, but I like different sports – basketball and swimming, for example – and just sitting at home and reading. Bob: What sort of books do you like? Sally: Oh, love stories – romantic books. Bob: And what do you want to be in the future? Sally: I want to be a sport teacher. I’m a student at college. I want to get my teacher’s diploma. Bob: I see. Now tell me….. Week 6 Period 18 Date of preparing:. 25 / 9/ 2016. Date of teaching. /9/20 16. Unit 3: PEOPLE’S BACKGROUND Lesson 5: WRITING Allocated time: 45 minutes I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: Writing about people’s background (useful structures to write about background) 2. Skills: Integrated skills( mainly Writing skills) 3. Attitude: It aims to practice writing about backgrounds 4. Main points: vocabulary 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: get the way how to write a paragraph II. Teaching preparation 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk. 2. Preparation of students: textbook, notebook, pen… III. Activities of teaching and learning Content Check- up: 2 students to make an interview about Sally’s background I. Warm up (7 mins) Matching the items in A with the information in B A B 1.Name a. Boston 2.Date of birth b.Kengsinton High 3.Place of birth school 4.School c. English, Maths, attended French 5.Exams passed d.Tourist guide 6.Previous jobs e.David Brown 7.Interests f.12/11/86 g.Music and. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Teacher’s activities T asks students to make an interview about Sally’s background T asks Ss to close their textbook and match the items in A with the information in B. 45. Students’ activities make an interview about Sally’s background Work in pairs. match the items in A with the information in B. Competenc es Speaking Being able to complete a form. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(46) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School dancing Expected answer: 1e 2f 3a 4b 5c 6d 7g I. Pre-writing:(15 mins) Read a CV and answer questions: Mr. Brown was born on 12th November, 1969 in Boston. He went to Kensington High school and passed exams in English, French, and Mathematics. He worked in a travel agency from June 1991 to December 1998. And from 1999 to 2002, he worked as a hotel telephonist. He likes music and dancing. Questions: What is CV? - Which tenses are used? Which information is presented? What are the uses of prepositions and connectors? Expected answer: C.V: cirriculum vitae -a form with details about somebody’s past education and jobs: bản sơ yếu lý lịch C.V normally consists of following items Personal information/data: use simple past tense … was born on… in…. Education: use past simple tense He/ she studied/ went to…. school Previous jobs: use past simple tense He/she worked as…. Interests: use simple present tense: He/ she likes… and….. II. While-Writing:(15 mins). TASK 2: Asking for information Name Date of birth Place of birth Education: School attended Exams passed: Previous job:. Mr./Ms. Date from/ date to *Education: which school did you go to? When? * Exams: which exams did you pass? When? *Hobby/ Interests: What’s your hobby? What do you do in your free time? * Sports: Do you like play sports? What sports do you like playing? * Job: What did you work? When? TASK 3 Write a paragraph about your partner’s parents. III. Post-writing:( 5 mins) Presenting the writing and checking IV. Consolidation and homework:(2 mins). Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. T explains the elements of a C.V by asking Ss to read Mr. Brown’s C.V. Read Mr. Brown’s C.V and answer questions Understand ing the sample CV. Listen and take notes T helps sts to find out the answers. T asks Ss to work in pairs and ask the partner for the information about his/her parents and complete the form. T goes around the class and provides help by giving suggested Qs. T asks sts to write a paragraph as directed. T offers help if necessary T checks sts’ writing by asking their partners to find out the mistakes Summarises the main points of the lesson. - Writing about background - prepare for LF. 46. Work in pairs and ask the partner for the information about his/her parents and complete the form.. Exchangin g informatio n. Use the sample paragraph and information from their friend to write a paragraph about their partner’parent. Practising writing about backgroun d. Check the mistakes with T and selfcorrect. Checking the mistakes. Complete their writing. Self- study. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(47) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences 1. Table of description of competence level. Levels Content Writing. RECOGNITION L1 Recognizing main information to write a CV. UNDERSTANDING L2 Making questions to get information to write about other people’s background. APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATION L3 APPLICATION L4 Writing a paragraph about background. Checking whether the information is correct. 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises A. Recognition: Asking for information Name Mr./Ms Date of birth Place of birth Education: School attended Exams passed: Previous job: Date from/ date to B. Understanding: * Personal information: What’s his/ her name? Where and when was he/ she born? *Education: which school did you go to? When? * Exams: which exams did you pass? When? * Job: What did you work? When? *Hobby/ Interests: What’s your hobby? What do you do in your free time? * Sports: Do you like play sports? What sports do you like playing? C. Low and High application: Presenting a background using cues ………… was born on ……………….. in …………….. He went to ……………. school and passed exams in ……………. and …………s. He worked in a ……………. from ………. to …………../ in………... He likes …………… and ………. Evaluation: Ngày 26 tháng 09 năm 2016 TTCM ký duyệt tuần 6. HỨA THỊ HOÀI THANH Week 7 Period 19 Date of preparing:. 01/10/ 2016. Date of teaching. /10/20 16. Unit 3: PEOPLE’S BACKGROUND Lesson 6: LANGUAGE FOCUS Allocated time: 45 minutes I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: Distinguishing the sounds /e/ and /æ/, learning how to use past perfect tense and distinguish the use of the past perfect Vs. the past perfect 2. Skills: Integrated skills 3. Attitude: It aims to improve pronunciation and grammar and use them to communicate. 4. Main points: the sounds /e/ and /æ/ and grammar point past perfect tense 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: get the way how to do tasks. II. Teaching preparation. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 47. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(48) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk. 2. Preparation of students: textbook, notebook, pen…. III. Activities of teaching and learning Content Checking: Asking Ss to read a paragraph about sb’s background WARM_UP: Guessing a pen and a hat PRONOUNCIATION: /e/ and /æ/ 1.Example: pen hat /e/ /æ/ /e/: ten, said, bed, many, /æ/: cat, bag, bad… 2.Practice: Read sentences in textbook 3. Exercise: Pick out the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the other words. 1. A. happen B. many C. man D. family 2. A. elephant B. send C. better D. pretty 3. A. eleven B. said C. anyone D. met Presentation: GRAMMAR Present the past perfect tense Ask questions about 1. The past perfect a. Form: + affirmative: S + had + PP +O + negative: S + had not + PP +O + question: Had + S + PP + O ? b.Use: The past perfect tense can be used to describe : * an action before a point of time in the past: * An action that had happened before another past action: 3.Adv: BY + time Before, after, when, as soon as + clause 2. The past perfect vs. the past simple Action used with HAD +V3/ed completed before that used with V2/ed PRACTICE: Exercise 1: Use the verbs in brackets in the past perfect. Expected answer: 1.had broken 6.had been 2.had done 7.had left 3.had met 8.had moved 4.hadn’t turned off 9.hadn’t seen 5.had ever seen 10.had broken in Exercise 2: Put the verbs in brackets in the past simple or the past perfect. -Expected answer: 1.had just finished /came 2.had seldom travelled/went 3.went/had already taken 4.Did you manage/ had he gone 5.had just got/ phoned /had been. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Teacher’s activities T checks writing T uses 2 real objects: a pen and a hat to ask and lead in the pronunciation T helps Ss to distinguish two sounds Ask them to listen and repeat Calls on some Ss to pronounce two sounds. T gives the situation: Last night, after I had watched TV, I went to bed.. -Have Ss compare their answers with a friend. - Call on some Ss to read aloud their answers in front of the class.. Students’ activities Competences read a paragraph about Completing sb’s background writing about background Open their textbooks and practice the sentences. - Peer correction. Distinguishing 2 sounds. Note that the action in the past perfect is always before another past action. Understanding the form and use of the present perfect tense. Do exercises in pairs and write on the board -Make sure all the verbs have been put the correct form. read aloud their answers in front of the class. Distinguish the past simple and past perfect tenses. -T asks Ss to read the story carefully and ask them some questions. 48. Giving the correct form of verbs. Distinguishing the past simple and past perfect tenses. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(49) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Exercise 3: Correction mistake Expected answer: Sentence 1:had climbed -> climbed 3:had turned ->turned 5:had called -> called 7:had heard -> heard 9:went -> had already gone. III. Production( 5 mins) Make statements about what they did IV. Consolidation and homework:(2 mins). about the story to make sure Ss have general understanding + What is the story about ? + Who are in the story ?.............. -Have Ss work in pairs and find five mistakes in the use of tenses in the story.. read the story carefully and ask them some questions about the story to make sure Ss have general understanding. T explains the tasks. Use pp and ps to make sentences Retell all grammatical points that you have learnt Do exercises in workbook for extra class. T asks sts to: Retell all grammatical points that you have learnt And do exercises in workbook for extra class. Finding the mistakes. work in pairs and find five mistakes in the use of tenses in the story. Talking about past actions. IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences 1. Table of description of competence level. Levels Content pronunciation Grammar. RECOGNITION L1 Recognizing Words containing/e/ and /æ/ The form of past perfect. UNDERSTANDING L2 Understanding the pronunciation of words containing letters e, a The use of past perfect and past simple, Giving the correct form of words. APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATION L3 APPLICATION L4 Choosing words Pronouncing words with different correctly pronunciation Choosing the best Transforming form of words sentences using past perfect. 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises A. Recognition: Pick out the word that has the underlined letter pronounced /æ / or / e /. prefer, marry, man, woman, extreme, exactly, complete, education, together, have, tragic, General, death, professor , village. Key: Marry, man, exactly, have, tragic, Education, together, general, death, professor B. Understanding: Give the correct simple past tense or past perfect tense. 1. I arrived home and ( find ) …………. that a thief ( break )…………… in. 2. We had just gone to bed when we ( hear ) ………… a knock at the door. 3. They told me that they ( never / meet )………….. me. 4. My friends didn’t want to come to the cinema with me because they ( already / see )………..…. the film. 5. Tom was very angry and ( say ) …………. that he ( eat ) ………… two flies in his salad. 6. What did you think as soon as you ( read ) ………. the passage? 7. She ( not / ride ) …………………… a horse before that day. 8. “Was Tom there when you arrived?”- “No, he (go)……….. home”. 9. Where you ( work )……….. before you ( come ) ……. here last month? 10. By the time you ( get ) …………..her letter, she ( arrive )………….. in London. Key: 1. found/ had broken 2. Heard 3. had never met. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 49. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(50) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 4. had already 5. said/ had eaten 6. had read 7. had not ridden 8. had gone 9. had---- worked/ came 10. got/ had arrived C. Low and High application: Sentence transformation 1. Just when he arrived at the station, the train started to move. Hardly .............................................................................................. 2. She watched TV, then she prepared her lessons.  After ……………………………………………… 3. Before he returned his home town. He had spent his childhood in Oslo for ten years,  Having .......................................................................... 4. John worked very hard for the exam, then he passed it.  Before ............................................................................. Key: 1 Hardly had he arrived at the station when the train started to move. 2. After she had watched TV, she prepared her lessons. 3 Having spent his childhood in Oslo for ten years he returned his home town. 4. Before John he passed the exam, he had worked very hard for it. Evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………. Week 7 Date of planning: 02/ 10/2016 Period: 20th. Date of teaching: ....../10/ 2016. REVISION FOR THE FIRST 45-MIN TEST I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: Review main language knowledge: vocabulary, pronunciation, reading, listening skills and grammar points - distinguish pairs of vowels: /I/ and /i:/; /ʌ/and /ɑ:/; /e/and /æ/ - Tenses: simple present, simple past, past perfect - Gerund and to Infinitive - Wh-questions 2. Skills: Reading, speaking, listening and writing skill 3. Attitudes: Actively take part in classroom activities, try to find out answers 4. Orientation formation and capacity development - General capacity : self-study, use this point of language to communicate correctly - Specialized capacity : do exercises correctly correctly 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: get the way how to do tasks. II. Teaching preparation 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk. 2. Preparation of students: textbook, notebook, pen…. III. Activities of teaching and learning Content I. Check-up: Give the correct simple past tense or past perfect tense. 1. I arrived home and ( find ) …………. that a thief ( break ) …………… in. 2. We had just gone to bed when we ( hear ) ………… a knock at the door. 3. They told me that they ( never / meet )………….. me. 4. My friends didn’t want to come to the cinema with me because they ( already / see )………..…. the film. 5. Tom was very angry and ( say ) …………. that he ( eat ) ………… two flies in his salad. Key: 1. found/ had broken 2. Heard3. had never met 4. had already 5. said/ had eaten. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 50. Teacher’s activities T writes exercises on the board. Students’ activities Sts do exercises. Competen ces Checking the past perfect. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(51) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School II. New lesson: Activity 1: Revise the main language knowledge: 1. Vocabulary of Unit 1, 2, 3: definition, expression 2. Pronunciation of /i:/ and /I/; /^/and /a:/; /e/ and /æ/ 3. Grammar: - The present simple/ Adverbs of frequency. - The past simple - Wh- questions - Gerund and to + infinitive - The past perfect/ The past perfect vs. the past simple Stress: from new words of 3 units Pronunciation: 3 pairs /I/-/i:/; //ʌ/ /a:/ ; /e/ and /æ/ Writing: error identification; jumbled sentences Activity 2: PRACTICE Choose the word that has the underlined letter(s) pronounced differently from the others. 1.a. bucket b. budget c. bushes d. business 2.a. marvelous b. far c. hard d. travel 3.a. love b. cousin c. worry d. wrote 4.a. father b. party c. talk d. charge Choose the word that has stress pattern different from that of the other words. 1. A. translation B. profession C. condition D. interaction 2. A. service B. receive C. lobby D. weather 3. A. background B. biologist C. battle D. chemist 4. A. achievement B. activist C. arrest D. award 5. A. airport B. passenger C. technology D. chemistry Choose the best option that best completes each sentence: 1. My friend_____________ to the museum last weekend. A. goes B. went C. had gone D. have gone 2. Thu and Lan_____________ close friends for years. A. are B. were C. had been D. have been 3. Our Singaporean friends_________ to visit our school last year. A. is coming B. come C. came D. have come 4. We_____________ Malaysia last summer. A. visited B. were visiting C. are visiting D. have visited 5. The alarm goes off at 4:30. A. goes wrong B. goes away C. rings D. plays 6. Her parents want him_______________ some good books to read. A. to choose B. choose C. chose D. choosing 7. Would you like_____________ and visit my country? A. come B. coming C. to come D. came 8. The children______________ their parents for a long time. A. didn’t see B. haven’t seen C. don’t see D. haven’t see 9. I and Kenny_________ penpal friends since I____Singapore. A. are-visit B. were-visited C. have been-visited D. were-have visited 10. The children enjoy______________ with their friends through computers. A. to chat B. chat C. chatting D. chatted 11. We chat about our work. A. talk in a friendly way B. learn C. discuss D. worry 12. What is Mr. Vy’s ? - He is a peasant. A. job B. profession C. career D. All are correct 13. We study past and present events in Viet Nam and around the world in_______ classes. A. Geography B. History C. English D. Maths. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 51. T helps sts revise the main language knowledge:. answer qs Students represent what they’ve learnt. Revising the main language knowledg e. Write down and do these exercises. T writes exercises on the board. prepare for the test. Choosing the word that has the underline d letter(s) pronounc ed differentl y from the others.. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(52) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 14. Mr. Lam is a ______- . He rides a lot of passengers every day. A. teacher B. doctor C. farmer D. cyclo driver 15. Miss Phuong enjoys working with children in a school. She is a _______. A. teacher B. student C. peasant D. passenger 16. Which of these expressions is commonly used when people start conservation? A. Goodbye. See you later. B. Hello. What are you doing? C. Well, it’s been nice meeting you.D. Great. I’ll see you tomorrow. 17. Lan is taking English this __________. A. party B. hotel C. beach D. semester 18. I can speak two____________- Vietnamese and English. A. addresses B. names C. languages D. occupations 19. I was born in Dong Thap. Dong Thap is my __________ . A. date of birth B. place of birth C. present address D. surname 20. Nam is one of the most intelligent boys in my class. His sex is________. A. male B. female C. girl D. daughter 21. It is a ________ day, so we decided to go for a walk. A. nice B. good C. beautiful D. All are correct 22. Marie Curie is a brilliant and mature student. A. young B. very good C. having a fully developed mind D. difficult 23. She received a general________ in local school. A. educate B. education C. educational D. educated 24. My favourite ________is Literature. A. subject B. teacher C. job D. student 25. Mr. Brown ___________Kensington High School when he was young. A. passed in B. attended C. travelled D. worked 26. The alarm goes off and Mr. Lam gets up _______ 4:30. A. in B. at C. on D. for 27. We are contented______ what we do. A. with B. from C. of D. about 28. Mr. Lam usually _________ an old man from District 1 to District 5. A. ride B. rides C. riding D. rode 29. Last year I _________my summer holidays at a seaside town. A. spend B. spends C. to spend D. spent 30. Mr. Ha worries_________ his son’s safety. A. on B. for C. about D. at Make questions from the underlined words: 1. My name’s Hoai Linh 2. I was born in 1980 3. I live in Ha Noi 4. I graduated from University in 2004 Make questions : Expected answers: 1. What’s your name? 2. When were you born? 3. Where do you live? 4. When did you graduate from University? III. Consolidation and Homework: The matrix of the test. T explains the matrix. Review the lessons. Ready for the test. IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences 1. Table of description of competence level MATRIX OF THE 1st 45 MINUTE TEST – ENGLISH 10 Time allotted: 45 minutes- Total questions: 40. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 52. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(53) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School ( x: Question) MULTIPLE CHOICE 0.25 *24= 6. Part/section/ Q.no. Test items. Question levels Re. WRITTEN FORM ( 4). Un. App. Phonetics. + Sound: /e/ and /i:/ ; / o / and /ɑ:/ ;/e/and /æ/ + stress. 2x. 1. Lexis 2. Grammar. + Vocabulary. x. 2x x. 2x. x. x. x x x x. Reading 1. + Tenses: past perfect, past simple, simple present + V-ing/ to V/ Bare V + word-form + prep + Wh- question + close/ start a conversation +Cloze text: People’s background. x 2x. 2x. Listening 1. Choose the best answer. x. 2x. x. 2x. 2x. + Answering questions: A day in the life of. Reading 2 Listening 2. + Listen and decide T/ F. Writing 1 Writing 2. + Making questions/ Sentence transformation + write a paragraph about your daily routine. 2x. Total mark 40 câu = 10 điểm Percentage % Week 7 Date of planning: 02/ 10/2016 Period: 21. x. 2x. 12. 16. 4x 4x 12. 30%. 40%. 30%. Date of teaching: ....../10/ 2016 THE FIRST 45-MIN TEST. I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: Review main language knowledge: vocabulary, pronunciation, reading, listening skills and grammar points - distinguish pairs of vowels: /I/ and /i:/; /ʌ/and /ɑ:/; /e/and /æ/ - Tenses: simple present, simple past, past perfect - Gerund and to Infinitive - Wh-questions 2. Skills: Reading, speaking, listening and writing skill 3. Attitudes: Actively take part in classroom activities, try to find out answers 4. Orientation formation and capacity development - General capacity : self-study, use this point of language to communicate correctly - Specialized capacity : do exercises correctly correctly 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: get the way how to do tasks. II. Teaching preparation 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk. 2. Preparation of students: textbook, notebook, pen…. III. Activities of teaching and learning Content Test. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Teacher’s activities T observes carefully. 53. Students’ activities. Competences. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(54) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences 1. Table of description of competence level. Levels Content. RECOGNITION L1. APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATION L3 APPLICATION L4. UNDERSTANDING L2. 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises A. Recognition: B. Understanding: C. Low and High application:. Tổ trưởng ký duyệt tuần 7 Ngày 03 tháng 10 năm 2016. Hứa Thị Hoài Thanh Week 8: Date of planning: 02/10/2016 Date of teaching: ....../10/ 2016 Period: 22th CORRECTING ONE PERIOD TEST 1 I. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: Helping students to test their knowledge from unit 1 to 3 2. Skills: Reading, speaking, listening and writing skill 3. Attitudes: Actively take part in classroom activities, try to find out answers 4. Orientation formation and capacity development - General capacity : self-study, use this point of language to communicate correctly - Specialized capacity : do exercises correctly correctly 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: get the way how to do tasks. II. Teaching preparation 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk. 2. Preparation of students: textbook, notebook, pen…. III. Activities of teaching and learning Content The test. Teacher’s activities T gives and explains the key. Students’ activities Correct themselves. Competences Remembering knowledge. ---------------------------------------. Week 8 Period 23 Date of preparing:. 05 / 10/ 2016. Date of teaching. 06 /10/2016. Unit 4: SPECIAL EDUCATION Lesson 1: READING Allocated time: 45 minutes I. Objectives:. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 54. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(55) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 1. Knowledge: Reading a passage about general ideas and specific information about a teacher in a special class 2. Skills: Integrated skills ( mainly Reading skills) 3. Attitude: Self-help, self learning, participate in the construction of knowledge about the education in a special class 4. Main points: vocabulary comprehension, and passage comprehension about Teacher in a special class 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: broadening vocabulary about the topic and improving reading skills through tasks 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: Vocabulary comprehension: matching, extensive reading: multiple- choice questions, Intensive reading; gap-fill. Levels of competences Groups of competences. Levels I. Năng lực sử K I Tái hiện kiến dụng kiến thức thức. II. III. K II Vận dụng kiến thức. K III Liên kết và chuyển tải kiến thức P III Lựa chọn và vận dụng các phương pháp chuyên biệt để giải quyết vấn đề. Năng lực về phương pháp. PI Mô tả lại các phương pháp chuyên biệt. PII Sử dụng các phương pháp chuyên biệt. Năng lực trao đổi thông tin. X I Làm theo mẫu diễn tả cho trước. X II Sử dụng hình thức diễn tả X III Tự lựa chọn cách diễn tả và sử phù hợp dụng. Năng lực cá thể. C I : Áp dụng sự C II : Bình luận những đánh đánh giá có sẵn. giá đã có.. C III : Tự đưa ra những đánh giá của bản thân.. II. Teaching preparation 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk, handouts 2. Preparation of students: textbook, notebook, pen… III. Activities of teaching and learning Content Check- up: No I. Pre-reading:(10 mins): Jumbled word: DISABLED Brainstorm: words relates to DISABLED The deaf, the dumb, the blind, the handicapped, the mentally retarded Question: How can the deaf and the blind learn to communicate?. Teacher’s activities T gives jumbled words Asks ss to find correct words Asks sts to brainstorm the topic Gives questions about a picture. Students’ activities Rearrange the jumbled words to find out key word List words relating to Disabled Answer questions. 1. Who is he? 2. What did he invent? Expected answer: He is Louis Braille- He invented The Braille alphabet- The disabled use the alphabet. Find out the message in the textbook WE ARE THE WORLD Lead in: Today we are going to read a passage about a teacher in a special class.. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Competenc es Getting to know the topic Disabled KI, KII PII Knowing Braille alphabet. use the Asks sts to use the Braille Braille Alphabet to work Alphabet to out the message work out the message XI. 55. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(56) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Activity 1: Teach vocabulary + mentally- retarded (adj)unable to use a part of body in normal way: Chậm phát triển trí tuệ +proper schooling(n):enough and good study học hành đầy đủ +opposition(n) :  to oppose(v) to :phản đối +to try one’s best =to make effort(v) Cố gắng, nỗ lực hết mình +to be proud of (ad)=take pride on: Tự hào về + time-consuming ['taim kən'sju:miη](adj) . Taking or needing a lot of time : Tốn thời gian +demonstrate ['demənstreit](vt)  demonstration [,deməns'trei∫n](n) An act of showing or explaining how to do something Minh họa + deaf (adj) Unable to hear :Điếc + dumb(adj) Unable to speak: Câm +blind(adj) Unable to see: mù Activity 2: Checking vocabulary TASK 1: Matching The words in A appear in the reading passage. Match them with their definitions in B. Expected answer: 1.c 2.e 2.a 4.b 5.d. T writes words on the board. II. While-reading:(15 mins) TASK 2: Multiple choice: read the passage again more carefully and complete the sentences by circling the corresponding letter A,B,C or D Expected answer: 1.D 2.B 3.A 4.C 5.D Some questions related to the passage: 1. Why is Thuy’s class different from other classes? 2. At first, did the parents agree to send their children to the special class? 3. What did the parents realize after that? 4. How is Thuy’s work? What did she do in a Maths lesson? 5. What did the writer think about Thuy’s work? III. Post-reading:( 5 mins): 1.Summary the text -Expected answer: 1.disabled 6.time-consuming 2.read 7.Maths 3.write 8.arms 4.efforts 9.fingers 5.opposition 10.proud 2. Report about Ms Thuy’s class. Gives explanation for their choice. Gives some questions related to the passage:. -T asks Ss to work in pair and read the summary of the passage carefully. -Encourage Ss to guess the missing words. -Have Ss complete the summary in pairs. Asks sts to report about the special class. -Work individually to complete the summary. IV. Consolidation and homework:(2 mins) Call 2 Ss to read the text aloud in front of class. - Learnt new words by heart - Prepare Lesson 2: SPEAKING.. Summarises the main points of the lesson. Asks Ss to learn new words and prepare the new lesson.. listen. Uses some techniques to teach vocab: translation, definitions, word form, synonyms, pictures, eliciting from sts… to teach words. Take notes Answer T’s questions. Reads modally and asks sts read in chorus. Knowing the meaning, spelling and pronunciati on of new words X1. Read in chorus and individually. Asks Ss to read the passage individually and to do Task 1: encourages Ss to guess the meaning of the words in the context.. compare their answers with a friend. read their answers aloud in front of the class. Sts read the passage and choose the best answer. Knowing the definition of words. Improving reading comprehens ion X2. Asks sts to give answers and locate where to find information Feedback and give correct answers:. Present about the special class. Summarisin g ideas Presenting a topic Cooperatio n problem solving XI,KII, PII CIII Self- study. IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 56. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(57) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 1. Table of description of competence level. Levels content Reading. RECOGNITION Recognize words to describe special education Task 1: Students will be able to recognize the meaning of words about Special Education by matching them with their definitions. UNDERSTANDING Task 2: Students can understand the passages to complete the sentences by choosing the best answers Q1,2,3,4. APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATION APPLICATIO N Students can Students can complete the interfere from summary with a the passage suitable word from about the the reading passage writer’s attitude towards Thuy’s work.Q5. 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises A. Recognition and B. Understanding: TASK 1: Choose the correct answer 1. Why is Ms Thuy’s class different from other classes? A. The children are disabled B. All the children are girls C. All the children are boys. D. The children are excellent. 2. Disabled children means: A. They are dumb B. They are deaf C. They are mentally retarded D. All are correct 3. Most of the children in Ms Thuy’s class are ………………….. A. rich B. poor C. intelligent D. brilliant 4. Why did their parents refuse to send their children to school at first? A. Because they were too poor to send their children to school. B. Because they thought that their children couldn’t learn anything. C. Because the children had to earn money. D. Because they thought learning is not good. 5. Teaching this kind of class is ……………………….. A. easy B. boring C. time-consuming D. interesting C. Low and High application: - Talk about a special class. Answer the question * What would happen to the disabled children if a special class weren’t organized for them?. Week 8 Period 24 Date of preparing:. 09 / 10/ 2016. Date of teaching:. /10/2016. Unit 4: SPECIAL EDUCATION Lesson 2: SPEAKING Allocated time: 45 minutes I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: Questions and answers used to make an interview about the study at school 2. Skills: Integrated skills( mainly Speaking skills) 3. Attitude: Self-help, self learning, participate in the construction of knowledge about making an interview 4. Main points: Filling in the blanks with the right questions, making an interview and reporting the results. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 57. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(58) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: get the way how to make an interview about the study at secondary school II. Teaching preparation 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk. 2. Preparation of students: textbook, notebook, pen…. III. Activities of teaching and learning Content I. Check-up: 5ms Vocabulary from the previous lesson (10 words) Answer questions about Teacher in a special class 1,Why is Thuy’s class different from other classes? Because the children are disabled 2, How many children attended her class in the first week and now? 5- 25 3, What can you do to help the disabled? II. Warm up (5mins) WARM_UP: Matching: A (Names of B (examples) subjects) 1.Maths a. Plants and animals 2.Physics b. gymnastics 3.History c.25x2+3x+10=0 4.Geography d. E=mc2 5.Physical e. H20 education f. the countries of the 6.English world 7.Chemistry g. the 2nd World War 8.Biology h. computers and their 9.Information applications Technology i. reading, writing and spelling Key: 1c, 2d, 3g, 4f, 5b, 6i, 7e, 8a, 9 h IV- New lesson: 1. What is your favourite subject? 2. Which one don’t you like? 3. How much time do you prepare for your lesson every day? I. Pre-speaking:(15 mins) TASK1: Study the conversation Fill in the blanks with the right questions. -Expected answer: A.4 B.1 C.2 D.6 E.3 F.5 G.7. II. While-Speaking:(15 mins) TASK 2: Make an interview 1. What were your subjects then? 2. What was your timetable? 3. What about homework? 4. Which lower-secondary school did you. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Teacher’s activities T asks sts to write new words, asks qs. -T asks Ss to give feedback and answer T’s questions.. Students’ activities Write new words and answer questions. Work in group and match the words in A with their expressions in B -The whole class answer questions. Competences Reviewing old lessons K1, X3. Sts can remember names of subjects and their examples K1, K2. Answer qs. X3. -Has Ss study the questions in the interview carefully. -Asks Ss to work individually and fill in the blanks with the right questions. -Gives Ss tips by asking them to read the answers before deciding the best question in the blanks. -Gives correct answer. study the questions in the interview carefully. fill in the blanks with the right questions.. Sts can fill in the blanks with the right questions X1, X2. -T asks Ss to work in pairs and carry out the interview, using the questions in task 1. Note: Ss are suggested to use his/ her own. work in pairs and carry out the interview, using the questions in task 1. -Work in pairs and carry out the. Sts can carry out the interview, using the questions in task 1.. T asks qs. 58. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(59) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School go to? 5. What part of the school life didn’t you like then? 6. Can you tell me about the tests and examinations at your school then? 7. What did you like best about your school then?. information to answer the questions. -Goes around the class and provides help when necessary.. interview, using the questions in task 1. -Ss imitate the example in textbook Ss report the information of your partner.. K3, P3. III. Post-speaking:( 5 mins) TASK 3: Report the interview Samples: Hanh went to Long Bien Lower-secondary school .She had 10 subjects to learn at school. She went to school in the morning and often had 5 classes each morning.. -Tells your class about what you know about your partner. -Calls on some Ss to -Tell the whole class to comment on presenter’s performance. -Make necessary corrections.. use the information in the interview to make a minipresentation about his/ her partner.. Presenting a topic. IV. Consolidation and homework:(2 mins) Ask and answer about activities at school. Report about your work and your partner.. Summarises the main points of the lesson. - Asks Ss to learn new words and prepare the new lesson.. Homework - Write a short paragraph about 50 words about your studying at school - Prepare Lesson 3:LISTENING. Self study. Sts can use the information in the interview to make a minipresentation about his/ her partner X2, P3. IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences 1. Table of description of competence level. Levels Topic Speaking. RECOGNITION Remember words about school life Task 1: Students can find out the suitable questions for given responses. UNDERSTANDING Task 2: Students know how to make an interview. APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATION APPLICATI ON Students can report Students can results based on the report results sample dialogue freely. 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises A. Recognition and B. Understanding: * Interview your partner, using the questions below: 1. What’s your name? 2. Do you like English? 3. What is your favorite subject? 4. What lower-secondary school did you go to? 5. Do you go to school on Saturday? 6. How many subjects do you learn at school? What are they? 7. What is your timetable? 8. Do you have to do a lot of homework?. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 59. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(60) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 9. What kinds of tests and exams do you have? 10. What do you like best about your school? C. Low and High application: Report an interview. Tổ trưởng ký duyệt tuần 8 Ngày 10 tháng 10 năm 2016. Hứa Thị Hoài Thanh. Week 9 Period 25 Date of preparing:. 09 / 10/ 2016. Date of teaching:. /10/2016. Unit 4: SPECIAL EDUCATION Lesson 3: LISTENING Allocated time: 45 minutes I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: Helping students to listen for specific information about Olympic Champion 2. Skills: Integrated skills( mainly Speaking skills) 3. Attitude: It aims to practise listening skills through completing some listening tasks: Deciding on True/ False statements and Filling gaps 4. Main points: vocabulary about the Olympic Champion and listening tasks 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving…. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 60. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(61) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School - Specialized Competences: get the way how to do tasks.(listening tasks) II. Teaching preparation 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk, cassette, CD 2. Preparation of students: textbook, notebook, pen…. III. Activities of teaching and learning Content I-Settlement: II-Checking: Asking 2 Ss to play a conversation about activities at their school III- New lesson: Warm-up: JUMBLED WORD CAMERA/ PHOTOGRAPH. PRE-LISTENING: Activity 1: Explain the new words in the box and fill in the blanks with the correct form of PHOTOGRAPH New words + photograph /’fəʊtəɡrɑ:f/ (n):a picture or imagine taken by photographers: bức ảnh,tấm ảnh +photographer(n):a person who takes pictures +photography(n): môn, ngành nhiếp ảnh +photogenic /,fəʊtəʊ’dʒenɪk/ (adj): ăn ảnh +photographic(adj):belong to photography + surroundings /sə’raʊndɪŋz/ (n) conditions, objects that make the living environment: + sorrow /‘sɒrəʊ/ (n) = sadness ; pain or distress caused by loss or disability: + passion(n) great love for something: +exhibition(n):a display, a public showing take note -Expected answer: 1.photographic 2.photography 3.photographer 4.photograph 5.photogenic. Activity 2: Match the words in A with their meaning in B 1. Surroundings 2. Sorrow 3. Passion 4. (to)stimulate 5. Photogenic 6. Photography 7. Labourer /‘leɪbər ə(r)/. Teacher’s activities Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance. The whole class and listen to T’s eliciting and give out the correct words. -T asks Ss to work in pairs and fill each of the blanks with one word from the box. -Call on some Ss to read the answers aloud in front of the class.. listen to T’s eliciting and give out the correct words - take notes -ss Pronounce all words in chorus. work in pairs and fill each of the blanks with one word from the box.. Competences KII K II Vận dụng kiến thức X III. PII K I Tái hiện kiến thức KI. read the answers aloud in front of the class.. Giving the correct form of PHOTOGRA PH. -T explains the following words that will appear in the recording. T gives the matching activity. a. niềm say mê b. người lao động c. nhiếp ảnh d. nỗi buồn e. khuyến khích, thúc đẩy f. môi trường xung quanh g. ăn ảnh, lên ảnh đẹp Key: 1f, 2d, 3a, 4e, 5g, 6c, 7 b WHILE-LISTENING: -T asks Ss to read the. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Students’ activities Greeting 2 Ss to play a conversation about activities at their school. 61. Sts match the words with their V equivalents. sts can find the correct V meanings of words. -Listen and repeat them.. read the statements. P2, P3. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(62) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School TASK 1:True or false Expected answer: 1.T 2. F(Information not given) 3. T 4.F (The subjects of their photos about people and scenery) 5.T. TASK 2:Gap-filling: -Expected answer: 1.photographic 6.simple 2. 19 7.peaceful 3.exhibition 8.chickens 4. 50 9.stimulated 5. beauty 10.escape. POST-LISTENING Questions and answer: 1. Who are the members of the club? 2. What are they doing in Hanoi? 3. How many photographs are on display? 4. What are their photos about? 5. What does their passion of taking photographs help them? Expected answer: 1. all disabled children 2. They are now having their first exhibition in Hanoi 3. More than 50 colour photos are on display. 4. About the beauty of daily life seen through the eyes of these disabled children 5. It stimulated them and helped them escape their sorrow. Consolidation: - Retell the information what you’ve listened about Vang Trang Khuyet’s Club. Homework. statements carefully. -Encourage Ss to guess whether the statements are true or false. -Plays the tape three times and then tell Ss to compare their answers with a friend. -Checks the answers as the whole class -T asks Ss to read a part of the talk carefully and have a guess of the missing words. -Has Ss listen to the tape and write in each blank with a suitable word. -Calls on some Ss to read the answers aloud in front of the class. -Feedback and give correct answers: -T asks Ss to answer the following questions:. carefully. guess whether the statements are true or false -Work individually and then compare their answers with a friend. read a part of the talk carefully and have a guess of the missing words. listen to the tape and write in each blank with a suitable word.. answer the following questions:. K1, K2 sts can identify T/ F statements and give the evidence. X2, K1 Sts can fill in the gaps correctly. T asks sts to summarise the main points of the lesson and sets homework for them. Homework - Write a short paragraph about 50 words about this club. - Prepare Lesson 4:WRITING. C1, K III Liên kết và chuyển tải kiến thức. IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences 1. Table of description of competence level. Levels Topic Listening. RECOGNITION Recognize word family about Photograph, words about VTK club Task 2: Students can. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. UNDERSTANDING Task 1: Students can listen to some information about a photography club and. 62. APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATION APPLICATION Students can answer Students can retell questions about the the story about the story VTK Photography club. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(63) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School listen and fill each blank with a suitable word. decide whether the statements are True or False. 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises A. Recognition: Matching the words in A with their meaning in B 1. Surroundings a. niềm say mê 2. Sorrow b. người lao động 3. Passion c. nhiếp ảnh 4. (to)stimulate d. nỗi buồn 5. Photogenic e. khuyến khích, thúc đẩy 6. Photography f. môi trường xung quanh 7. Labourer /‘leɪbərə(r)/ g. ăn ảnh, lên ảnh đẹp Key: 1f, 2d, 3a, 4e, 5g, 6c, 7 b B. Understanding: Questions and answer 1. Who are the members of the club? 2. What are they doing in Hanoi? 3. How many photographs are on display? 4. What are their photos about? 5. What does their passion of taking photographs help them? Expected answer: 1. all disabled children 2. They are now having their first exhibition in Hanoi 3. More than 50 colour photos are on display. 4. About the beauty of daily life seen through the eyes of these disabled children 5. It stimulated them and helped them escape their sorrow. C. Application: Present about the VTK club: What do you think about the members of this club? Evaluation:……………………………………………………………………………….. Week 9 Period 26 Date of preparing:. 15 / 10/ 2016. Date of teaching. /10/2016. UNIT 4: SPECIAL EDUCATION Lesson 4: WRITING Allocated time: 45 minutes I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: A letter of complaint and how to write a letter of complaint 2. Skills: Integrated skills( mainly Writing skills) 3. Attitude: It aims to practice writing a letter of complaint 4. Main points: vocabulary about letter of complaints 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: get the way how to write a paragraph II. Teaching preparation 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk. 2. Preparation of students: textbook, notebook, pen… III. Activities of teaching and learning Content. Teacher’s activities. Checking: Asking 2 Ss to give the correct form of words 1.My father is one of the most famous (photograph) in the city. 2. I have been studying (photograph) for 5 years. 3. The beauty of (day) life has been captured by disabled children.. I-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance. II-Checking: Asking 2 Ss to give the correct form of words. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 63. Students’ activities Greeting Give the correct form of words. Competenc es K1, X1 Sts can give the correct form of words. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(64) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 4. The members of the club are the (mental) retarded children. Answer: 1.photographer,2.photography,3 daily,4.mentally New lesson: WARM-UP: Categorizing: put the given word into right box compliments(khen ngợi) and complaints(phàn nàn) Bad, helpful, expensive, lazy, hardworking, good, careful, poor, unhappy, beautiful, clever, clear compliments Helpful Hardworking. -T asks Ss to work in groups of four. Give ten or more adjectives and ask Ss to put them under two headings: -Feedback and give correct answers:. work in groups of four. Give ten or more adjectives and ask Ss to put them under two headings:. Sts can know more about words used to complimen t and conplaints. complaints Bad Expensive. PRESENTATION Definition and format of a letter of complaint: Complaint is a kind of formal letter used when you are not happy with a service, a contract, a course... Tense used: present simple Connectors: - First of all or the first/ the second/ the third/also/ to make the matter worse. …….Finally A letter of complaint usually includes main parts: Address’s writer Address’s receiver Date - Salutation/Greeting - Opening (Reason to write) - Explaining the problem - Suggesting a resolution - Signature Complete the dialogue in Task 1: Example: First of all, you say that there are only native teachers, but my class has one Vietnamese teacher and two native teachers…. + native teachers: teachers who come from English- speaking countries +air -conditioned(adj) to be equipped/furnished with air-conditioners B. I’m definitely not happy with it at all B. There are only few native teachers, not all of them are native ones. B. In fact there are more than 30 students in my class. B. I have to pay for them. B. the room is not air conditioned .There is only one ceiling fan in my class room. It is very hot.. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Know the outline of the letter K2, P1 T gives definition and format of a letter of complaint Sts are able to understand definition and format of a letter of complaint. -T can explain some difficult words: -T asks Ss to use the information in column to complete the dialogue. -Feedback and give correct answers:. Complete the dialogue in Task 1: work in pair and then call some Ss to practise aloud in front of class.. K1, X1. P1 Sts can complete the dialogue in Task 1. 64. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(65) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School B. in fact classes often start late and finish early. Sometimes it starts 20 minutes late. PRACTICE: TASK 2:Complete the letter of complaint First of all, you say that there are only native teachers, but there are only few native teachers, not all of them are native ones. You also say that each class has no more than 20 students but in fact there are more than 30 students in my class. In the advertisement, you say we can have books and cassette tapes free of charge but we had to pay for them. To make the matter worse, the classroom is not air conditioned .There is only one ceiling fan in my class room. It is very hot. That is quite different from the advertisement. Finally, what I do not like most about your centre is the time. Classes often start late and finish early. Sometimes it starts 20 minutes late.. TASK 2:Complete the letter of complaint -Have Ss read the letter of complaint in the book and complete it basing on the dialogue in task 1. Notes: you say that( advertised), but (in reality) Present 5 (disappointed things) -Asks Ss to use appropriate connectors to make the writing smoother. -Tells Ss to exchange their writing with a friend. - Picks up some writing to check the mistakes as the whole class.. read the letter of complaint in the book and complete it basing on the dialogue in task 1. use appropriate connectors to make the writing smoother. exchange their writing with a friend. peer correction.. Sts can use some structures to complete the letter Use contrasting sentences …. PRODUCTION: punctuate the following formal complaint letter.. -T gives a short passage and asks Ss to set out and punctuate the following formal complaint letter. Divide it into paragraphs if you think it is necessary.. Try to punctuate their complaint letters correctly. X1, P3. Complete their writing. Self- study. IV. Consolidation and homework:(2 mins) - How to write a letter complaint. - How many parts are there in this kind of the letter?. Summarises the main points of the lesson. - prepare for LF. K1, X1, P2. IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences 1. Table of description of competence level. Level content Writing. RECOGNITION Task 1: Students can complete the dialogue using the information in the advertisements Students can know words used to complain. UNDERSTANDING Students can understand how to write a letter of complaint. APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATION APPLICATIO N Students can Students can complete the letter by write a letter of using the information complaint about from the dialogue in their real task 1 problems. 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises A. Recognition: Expressions used to give complaints B. Understanding: How to organize ideas in a letter of complaints C. Low and High application: Complete a letter of complaints about a bad service. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 65. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(66) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Evaluation: Week 9 Period 27 Date of preparing:. 15/10/ 2016. Date of teaching. /10/2016. UNIT 4: SPECIAL EDUCATION Lesson 5: LANGUAGE FOCUS Allocated time: 45 minutes I. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: Language focus * Pronunciation: Students will be able to pronounce and distinguish 2 sounds /ɒ/ and /ɔ:/ in individual words and in speech * Grammar and vocabulary: Students will be able to - Know how to form collective nouns of person, use article The in the structure the+ adjective to refer a group of people - Talk about past habits with the structure used to + infinitive - Use pronoun Which as a connector 2. Language Skills: Students will be able to improve Reading, speaking, listening and writing skills 3. Attitudes: Students will understand and sympathise with the disabled children. 4. Main points: 2 sounds /ɒ/ and /ɔ:/, structure the+ adjective, used to + infinitive, Which as a connector 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: get the way how to do tasks. II. Teaching preparation 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk. 2. Preparation of students: textbook, notebook, pen…. III. Activities of teaching and learning Content I-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance. II-Checking : no III- New lesson: WARM-UP(5ms)Game Bingo List of words: bottle not dog sport stop corner boss walk morning Shop more box PRONOUNCIATION (10ms): /ɒ/ and /ɔ:/ Presentation 1: bottle ['bɔtl] sport [spɔ:t] /ɒ/ a short vowel /ɔ:/:a long vowel(o+ r,l, al, ou) Là nguyên âm ngắn, nguyên âm dài, được được phát âm khi âm phát âm khi âm o o đứng cùng các phụ đứng cùng các phụ âm sau: ON, OT, OP, âm sau: OR, ORE, OCK, OB, OL. AL(L), ALK, AW, Ex:on,shop, knock, AU. rol,doll, Ex: port, more, always fawn, fault , cough Practice: textbooks Choose the word that has the underlined letter(s) pronounced differently from the others. 1a. tall b. stall c. shake d. talk 2a. top b. box c. doctor d. work 3a. organize b. force c. condition d. for. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Teacher’s activities. -Listen to T’s eliciting and take notes -T asks Ss to distinguish two sounds /ɒ/ and /ɔ:/. T explains some common rules. Pronounce modelly -Calls on some Ss to pronounce two sounds. 66. Students’ activities Ss work in groups of 4 and listen to T’s pronunciation and write words that they listen clearly down on a small paper of each group .If any group has more six words, they will shout “bingo” and become a winner. Sts answer and take notes Listen and repeat - Open their textbooks and practise the individual words and sentences. Competen ces Sts can become familiar with words containin g target sounds X1. X2, P1. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(67) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School. Presentation: GRAMMAR (25ms): The poor, the rich 1.The + adjective = collective noun Ex: poor (adj).the poor (n); rich (adj)the rich (n) Note: Collective noun must be followed by plural verb. Ex: The sick are looked after by the doctors. The right need to be enhanced. the injured (người bị thương), the poor (người nghèo), the rich (ngườigiàu), the sick (người bệnh), the unemployed (người thất nghiệp), the young(người trẻ tuổi), the disabled (người khuyết tật), the blind (người khiếm thị),the dead (người chết), … Exercise 1 -Expected answer: 2.the injured 3.the unemployed 4.the sick 5.the rich/ the poor. T uses some pictures about poor people, rich people and asks ss to name them T asks ss to say our the form of The+ Adjective T asks ss to give some more examples Sts take notes T asks ss to do Exercise 1 Exercise 1 -Asks Ss to do the exercises -Has Ss compare their answers with a friend. -Call on some Ss to -Feedback and give correct answers:. give some more examples. X3, P2 X1, P3. answer the eliciting rules work individually and complete the sentences using the + one of the adjs in the book read their completed sentences.. K1, K2, C1. T uses a picture to ask ss to make a statement using Used to+ V Look at this picture and say about it. 2. Used to + infinitive (đã từng/thường) a. Form: S + used to + infinitive S + didn’t use to + infinitive Did + S + use to + infinitive? b.Use: past habit Diễn tả thói quen trong quá khứ, đã chấm dứt ở hiện tại. Ex: His father used to smoke 20 cigarettes a day. Now he gives up smoking. * Note: Phaân bieät caùch duøng USED TO & T asks ss to focus on the TO BE USED TO: structures a. USED TO + BARE INF. : past habit Chæ một thói quen hay việc thường làm trong T asks ss to distinguish the quá khứ, hiện tại không còn nữa. other structures b. TO BE USED TO + V-ING/NOUN.: present habit -Chỉ một việc quen làm ở hiện tại T asks ss to work in pairs hoặc tương lai to do Ex2/r Ex: Are you used to driving on the left hand T distributes handouts side? Practice: Exercise 2 We are used to the noise from the factory.. Sts can recognize the form… Do exercises about Used to. Choose the correct word between brackets. 1. My father didn't_____ coffee for breakfast. ( used to have/ use to have/ use to having) 2. Claude didn’t .............in Canada.(lived/ use to live/ used to live) 3. He ……………..wear a pair of glasses. (used to / use to / used) 4. “Are you a bus driver? ” - “ No, not anymore, but I ……. .” (used to / used to be / use to be ) 5. He ............…arrive at the office on time.(used. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 67. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(68) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School always to/used to always/always used to) 6. Susan………early when she stayed with us. (has got up/ used to get up/ gets up). -Expected answer: 1.use to have 2. use to live 3. used to 4. used to be 5. always used to 6. used to get up 3. Which as a connector Example: She arrived on time. This amazed everyboby. She arrived on time, which amazed everybody. Meaning: Using which to modify a whole sentence The pronoun this refers to the idea of a whole sentence which comes before. Use comma(,) before which c. Use: to replace a preceding clause. Exercise 3. Expected answers: 1. The street I live in is very noisy at night, which makes it difficult to sleep. 2. Our flight was delayed, which meant we had to wait for hours at the airport. 3. They have passed their examinations, which is good news. III. Production( 5 mins) Make statements about The + adjective (about a group of people), used to ( past habit), which as a connector IV. Consolidation and homework:(2 mins). T uses examples to help sts focus on the new points Practice: -Ask Ss to work in pairs and do exercise 3. Join a sentence from A with one from B to make a new sentence using which -Call on some Ss to read their sentences. -Feedback and give correct answers:. T asks sts to express about themselves Example: In the past, the poor used to work as a servant in a rich family, which made them unhappy. T asks sts to: Retell all grammatical points that you have learnt And do exercises in workbook for extra class. Work in pairs and do exercise 3. Join a sentence from A with one from B to make a new sentence using which read their sentences aloud. Sts work in groups to discuss:. X3, K3. Retell all grammatical points that you have learnt Do exercises in workbook for extra class. K2,K3. IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences 1. Table of description of competence level. Levels Topic Language focus. RECOGNITION Students can pronounce and distinguish 2 sounds /ɒ/ and /ɔ:/ in individual words correctly, remember some signal letters Students can recognize the form of The+ adjective, used to+ V, which as a connector. UNDERSTANDING Task 1: students can complete the sentences using the+ one of the adj Task 2: students can complete the sentences using used to+ V. APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATION APPLICATI ON Task 3: students can Students join pairs of know about sentences using be used to + which Ving/ be used for… Which as a relative pronoun. 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises Pronunciation: Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the rest. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 68. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(69) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 1. A. laptop 2. A. called 3. A. more. B. top B. fountain B. job. C. rob C. talk C. boss. D. bottom D. four D. wrong. 4. A. sport. B. walk. C. doctor. D. ball. 5. A. wrong. B. long. C. song. D. lose. b) Questions for understanding and application: Choose the best answer among A, B, C, or D that best fits the blank or that best explains the underlined part in each sentence 1. Our flight was delayed, ------------------ meant we had to wait for hours at the airport. A. that is B. this is C. which D. which is 2. She taught in a school for the deaf and dumb. A. people who are unable to see B. people who are mentally ill C. people who have a bad memory D. people who are unable to hear and speak 3. The rich --------------------- to help the poor. A. are expected B. is expected C. is expecting D. expects 4. She was given an award for her services to -----------------. A. disabled B. disable C. the disable D. the disabled 5. ------------------ eat a lot of ice-cream when you were a child? A. Did you used to B. Were you used to C. Were you using to D. Did you use to 6. I found it difficult at first, but now I ---------------- working on the computer. A. use to B. used to C. am use to D. am used to 7. He can’t --------------------- to her any more. A. talk B. tell C. say D. utter 8. Most of the children come from large and poor families, which -------------------- them from having proper schooling. A. makes B. prevents C. leads D. gets 9. Our teacher is very proud ----------------- her work. A. in B. at C. of D. with 10. Jane --------------for the telephone company, but now she has a job at the post office. A. works B. used to work C. having worked D. working 11. Without the Braille Alphabet, it would be very difficult for -------------------------. A. the disabled B. the deaf C. the mute D. the blind 12. They gave a clear -------------------- of their intentions. A. demonstrate B. demonstrative C. demonstration D. demonstrating 13. Her job is --------------------- of mentally retarded children in the area. A. looking B. taking care C. taking notice D. watching 14. Thuy’s class is different ------------------- other classes because the children are disabled. A. on B. from C. in D. at 15. John is always late for class, ----------------------- annoys the teacher. A. which B. this C. what D. that Choose the underlined part among A, B, C, or D that needs correcting: 16. Jane couldn’t come to my birthday party, this made me feel sad. A B C D 17. Dennis used to smoking a lot a year ago. A B C D 18. Check cards are used for replace money. A B C D 19. Ms Thuy doesn’t mind taking care for disabled children. A B C D 20. It took him a long time to get used to drive on the left. A B C D. Tổ trưởng ký duyệt tuần 9 Ngày 17 tháng 10 năm 2016. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 69. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(70) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School. Hứa Thị Hoài Thanh. Week 10 Date of planning: 24/10/2016. Period: 28 Date of teaching: …./10/2016. Unit 5: TECNOLOGY AND YOU Lesson 1: READING Allocated time: 45 minutes I. CONTENT: Lesson 1: READING period 1 II. AIMS AND OBJECTIVES: 1. Educational aims: By the end of this lesson, Ss are able to: - use the lexical items related to the topic "Technology and you". - know more about the vocabulary about computer systems and the use of computers in daily life 2. Skills: Integrated skills: Main skills : Reading, writing Sub-skills : speaking, listening 3. Attitude: Let students know more about computers and its uses in daily activities . Sts take active part in activities and tasks in class. 4. Orientation of competence development - General competence: self-study, solving problems, critical thinking, independent, communicative and cooperative competences. - Specific competence: + Reading and matching the words/ phrases with the illustrations of different parts of a computer system + Reading and guessing the meaning of words/ phrases in the context by matching them with definitions III. Methods, teaching techniques, teaching organization and teaching aids + Methods and teaching techniques: discussion, eliciting, communication + Teaching organization: individuals, pairs, groups, class… + Teaching aids: pictures, colored chalks, workbook, IV. TEACHING PROCEDURES: Content Check- up: No Stabilization (1ms) Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance. 1. Check-up: - Ask Sts to go the board and make sentences using the + adjective, used to + V and which as a connector Choose the best answer 1. When I was a boy, I _____ a kite in the afternoon. A. would to fly B. used to fly C. have flown D. flies 2. My father didn't_________coffee for breakfast. A. used to have B. use to have C. use to having D. used having 3. Claude didn’t _______ in Canada. A. lived B. use to live C. used to live D. to. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Teacher’s activities Distributes handouts with exercises for checking. Students’ activities Do the exercises individually. Competenc es KI, KII PII Revising language focus u4 X1, P1. 70. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(71) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School live 4. The little boy is helping____________cross the street. A. the poor B. the rich C. the blind D. the young 5. It rained all the time, __________ was a great pity. A. which B. what C. that D. who Which word has the underlined part pronounced differently from the rest? 6. A. laptop B. top C. rob D. bottom 7. A. more B. job C. boss D. wrong Combine these sentences, using Which 8. Tim has found a new job. That is lucky. …………………… 9. She usually comes to work on time. That pleases her boss. ………… 10. A dictionary is a book. This gives you the meaning of words.  ………. Expected answers: 1. B. used to fly 2. B. always used to 3. C. the blind 4. C 5. A 6. D 7. A 8. Tim has found a new job, which is lucky. 9. She usually comes to work on time, which pleases her boss. 10. A dictionary is a book, which gives you the meaning of words. PRE-READING (15ms) Warm-up: Guessing game This is a machine which can help me + do the calculations. + play games/ type documents + watch a film + listen to music -Ss guess what it is =>It is a computer Activity 1:Answering questions (3ms) 1. Do you have a computer? If yes, do you know how to use it? 2. Do you know what people use it for? -T asks Ss to work in groups Suggested answer: - to get information -to send or receive mail -to type documents - to entertain -to teach or study - to cure diseases -to design houses ,bridges or building -Work in groups Activity 2: Matching pictures (5ms) Expected answers: 1D, 2E, 3G, 4C,5A, 6F, 7B, 8H Lead in: Today we are going to read a passage about the uses of computer ( paragraph 1) Activity : Teach vocabulary Teaching Vocabulary (spelling, part of speech, collocation, V equivalents) 1.daily life (n) cuộc sống hàng này. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Take notes Answer T’s questions XI. T gives answers and leads to the new lesson (Write the name of the lesson on the before and help ss exploit the topic) -T gives Ss 4 facts and asks Ss to guess what it is? T asks qs about computers -T asks Ss to work in groups and match the words or phrases with each number -T explains some parts of a computer system by pointing at them -T calls some Ss to write their answers in front of class by showing pictures in random. Sts listen to questions and answer C I : Áp dụng sự đánh giá có sẵn Sts answer qs. Ss work in groups and match the words or phrases with each number. K II Vận dụng kiến thức Students will know the illustrations of different parts of computer X1. T writes words on the board Activity 3:Teaching Vocabulary T presents new words by using some. 71. C II : Bình luận những đánh giá đã có.. Sts take notes and read in chorus and. Knowing the meaning, spelling and pronunciati on of new words. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(72) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 2, scenic beauty: cảnh đẹp 3, magazine: (n) tạp chí 4, produce (v) sản xuất 5, receive : nhận 6, foreign language : ngoại ngữ. techniques:eliciting, using pictures/ visual aids, Vietnamese equivalents. Activity : Checking vocabulary TASK 1: Matching Expected answer: 1.c 2.e 2.a 4.b 5.d While you read: Answering questions: What can a computer do to help us in our daily life? 1. It helps us visit shops, offices and places of interests/ scenic beauty 2.  We pay bills, read newspapers, receive, send letters and learn foreign languages. POST-READING: Discussion What do you use computers for? Consolidation:- Retell the uses of the computer in our daily life. Homework: - Learn new words by heart - Prepare task 2 and 3 in page 55, revise the reading passage IV. Consolidation and homework:(2 mins) Call 2 Ss to read the text aloud in front of class. - Learnt new words by heart - Prepare Lesson 2: SPEAKING.. Reads modally and asks sts read in chorus T asks sts work in pairs to match words with definitions T explains questions. individually. X1. Match words with definitions Sts work in pairs to answers. T asks sts to answer about their uses of computers. Sts give answers. Summarises the main points of the lesson. Asks Ss to learn new words and prepare the new lesson. (2 paragraphs). Listen. PII Sử dụng các phương pháp chuyên biệt Improving reading comprehens ion X2 K II Vận dụng kiến thức. Self- study. IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences 1. Table of description of competence level. Levels Topic Reading. RECOGNITION Vocabulary: Recognize words to describe the use of computers the meaning of words about illustrations of different parts of a computer system. UNDERSTANDING Task 1: Match the words in the reading passage with their definitions. APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATION APPLICATI ON Students can answer After you read: the questions by Students can using the cues given summarize the in the spoken form content of the reading in the Spoken form.. 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises A. Recognition and B. Understanding: vocabulary exercises about computers These are incomplete sentences. Circle A, B, C, or D as the best choice to complete each sentence. 1. This computer is capable _________designing sophisticated graphics. A. in B. with C. of D. on 2. A computer is a ___________ machine. A. calculating B. adding C. calculation D. addition 3. What _________a computer such a miraculous device? A. do B. does C. makes D. make. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 72. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(73) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 4. She studies ____technology. She learns many things about computers. A. biology B. electricity C. genes D. information 5. ________is the physical part of the computer system. A. Software B. Hardware C. Sportswear D. Footwear 6. To __________means to link or act on each other. A. perform B. work C. interact D. communicate 7. The computer can manage large _______of data. A. collections B. collection C. collect D. collecting 8. Which of the following does not relate to the computer? A. software B. hard ware C. floppy disk D. footwear 9. What makes a computer such a ____________ device? A. miracle B. miraculous C. miraculously D. wonder 10. You can relax with computer games or by listening to _______music. A. computer-played B. computers-played C. computer-playing D. computers-playing 11. A computer is a ____________ typewriter which allows you to type and print any kind of document. A. magic B. magician C. magical D. magically 12. The Internet helps us to interact_____ other people around the world. A. to B. from C. of D. with 13._________is a system connecting millions of computer worldwide. A. The media B. The phone C. The television D. The internet 14. My father has bought me a(n) ____________ computer. A. economical B. electrical C. electric D. electronic 15. We can see a lot of information on the visual display unit (VDU). A. CD ROMs B. mouse C. computer screen D. printer 16. Microsoft Office Word, Excel, PowerPoint are ___________. A. software B. hardware C. floppy disks D. Keyboard C. Recognition: What do you use computers for? Self-evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………….............. ................................................................................................................................................................ Date of planning: 22/10/2016 Date of teaching: …./10/2016 Period: 29 UNIT 5: TECHNOLOGY AND YOU Reading I. CONTENTS: READING (2) II. OBJECTIVES 1. Educational aims: By the end of this lesson, Ss are able to: - know more about the vocabulary about computer systems and the use of computers in daily life - Scan and choose the best titles for each paragraph - Summarise the reading passage in the spoken or written forms basing on the guidelines. 2. Skills: Integrated skills: Main skills : Reading, writing Sub-skills : speaking, listening 3. Attitude: Let students know more about computers and its uses in daily activities . Sts take active part in activities and tasks in class. 4. Orientation of competence development - General competence: self-study, solving problems, critical thinking, independent, communicative and cooperative competences. - Specific competences: improving vocabulary about the uses of computers and reading skills: choosing the best title and answering questions III. Methods, teaching techniques, teaching organization and teaching aids + Methods and teaching techniques: discussion, eliciting, communication + Teaching organization: individuals, pairs, groups, class… + Teaching aids: pictures, colored chalks, workbook, IV. TEACHING PROCEDURES: I-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance. II-Checking: call 2 students to write new words on the board Write words related to computer. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 73. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(74) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School III- New lesson: Content Check up: vocabulary about computer system and questions about the use of computer WARM-UP (4ms) Game: Odd one out Game: Odd one out Sreaen; compuuter; sspeaker, mousee, keyiboard. Before you read: Teaching Vocabulary: 1. store storage (n) sự lưu trữ ( Ctrl +S= save) 2.miraculous (adj) like a miracle kỳ diệu 3.hardware:# software(Word, Powerpoint, Excel,,,) 4.capable of (adj) có khả năng 5.calculate/‘kælkjuleɪt/ (v) ( the common action for add, subtract, multiply or divide) tính toán : calculating machine : ( use real object 6.accuracy (n) ['ækjurəsi] sự chính xác accurate(adj) ['ækjurit] 7.electronic (adj) điện tử device (n) thiết bị 8.interact with(v) kết nối 9. magical (adj) kỳ diệu Checking vocabulary: Slap the board WHILE-READING Task 2: Answer these questions 1. What is a computer capable of? 2. What do we call a computer as? What can each type of machine do? Why is a computer a miraculous device? Expected answer: 1. It is capable of doing almost anything you ask. 2. a. A calculating machine which speeds up calculations with lightning speed and perfect accuracy. b. An electronic storage device which manages large collections of data. c. A magical typewriter which allows you to type and print any kind of document. d. A personal communicator which helps you to interact with other computers and with people around the world. e. for entertainment, you can relax by playing games, listening to computer- played music. TASK 3: Find out the best title for passage -Key: C: What can the computer do? POST-READING: Answer questions Answer questions 1. Do you usually use computers? 2. What can a computer do to help us in our. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Teacher’s activities T asks sts to be ready for checking T writes some misspelt words so that sts can delete the wrong letters to make the correct word. T writes down new words on the board T uses techniques to teach vocabulary. Students’ activities Write new words and answer qs Ss work in pairs. Competences K1, P1. Sts can remember words about computers K1 K1, P1. Sts take notes And answer eliciting questions from teacher. Knowing vocabulary. T asks sts to slap the E words after listening to V equivalent T asks sts to work in pairs to answer qs. Sts discuss and write down answers. Improving reading skills P2, K2. T tells Ss to read the passage more carefully and choose the best title for it T lets Ss discuss their answer with a friend T encourages them to explain their choice T asks qs Write qs on the board. 74. read the passage more carefully and choose the best title for it explain the choice Ss discuss in pairs and then make a small. Sts can find out the best title for passage. Sts can answer questions about the uses of. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(75) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School daily life? 3. What uses of computer may bring bad effects to its users? IV-Consolidation:- Retell the uses of the computer in our daily life./ V-Homework: - Learn new words by heart - Prepare UNIT 5:Part B:SPEAKING. goes around the class and provide help if necessary.. T consolidates the main points of the lesson. dialogue in front of the class.. computers. Sts can make a small dialogue in front of the class.. V. Questions of evaluating students’ competences 1. Table of description of competence level. Levels Topic Reading. RECOGNITION Vocabulary: 9 words from the 2nd and 3rd paragraph about some kinds of machine that a computer can function. UNDERSTANDIN G Task 2: answer the questions by using the cues given in the spoken form. APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATION APPLICATION Task 3: Find the best Talk about the other title uses of computers. 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises VI. EVALUATING QUESTIONS: A. Recognition: Choose the correct answer to each of the following questions. 1. The Internet helps us to interact ………other people around the world. A. to B. from C. of D. with 2. Computers are capable ………..doing almost anything you ask. A. in B. at C. of D. with 3. A computer is a ………..typewriter which allows you to type and print any kind of document. A. magically B. magical C. magic D. magician 4. What makes computer a miraculous device? A. strange B. powerful C. magical D. excellent 5. We read newspapers and magazines which have been produced on computers. A. born B. shaped C. begun D. manufactured 6. It is a calculating machine which speeds up calculations: it can add, subtract, multiply, and divide with lightning speed and perfect accuracy. A. precision B. goodness C. loveliness D. wonder 7. Decide which of the three options below is the best title for the passage. A. voices B. desires C. choices D. answers 8. Ask and answer questions about the uses of modern inventions. A. up-to-date B. new C. late D. present B. Understanding: Choose the correct answer to each of the following questions. 1. A …………is used to copy the information from a computer on to paper. A. photocopier B. printer C. speaker D. mouse 2. ________is the physical part of the computer system. A. Software B. Hardware C. Sportswear D. Footwear 3. A computer is a ___________ machine. A. calculating B. adding C. calculation D. addition 4. What makes a computer such a ………….device? A. miracle B. miraculous C. miraculously D. wonder C. Low and High application: Read the following passage and choose the best answer. In the last 100 years. technology has completely changed the way we live. At the touch of a button, we can look up almost anything we need to know on the Internet. We have electricity, aero planes. television, and we have. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 75. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(76) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School ever been to the moon. So what sort of inventions will there be in the 21st century? Indeed, is there anything important still left to invent? It seems that there is. Scientists all over the world are looking into Nan technology with a great deal of interest. This is the science of building small machines - and when we say small, we mean very small. To give you an idea of the size scientists are talking about, these machines would be about a million billion times smaller than the smallest bit of dust. Nan technology will bring about enormous changes. Doctors, for example, will he able to cure any illness. The environment will be improved because it will be possible to take the polluted air we breathe and make it clean again. But perhaps the most exciting thought of all is that we won't have to wait a thousand years for Nan technology - many people believe there is a good chance it will come in our lifetime. 1. This passage is mainly about ____________. A. inventions B. Nan technology C. technological changes D. small machines 2. According to the passage, _____________. A. our lives have been changed by technology B. we can use the Internet to get information C. we have been able to travel to the moon D. All are correct 3. Nan technology is_____________. A. the skill of building very small machines B. the science of building computers C. the new computer technology D. the recent advance in medical technology 4. Which change will Nan technology not bring about? A. Fatal diseases will be cured. B. The air will be cleaner. C. The pollution will be reduced. D. The environment will be protected. 5. Which of the following is not true? A. Scientists have a lot of interest in Nan technology . B. The size of the machines will be much smaller than the smallest bit of dust. C. Nan technology will bring about some changes in the medical field. D. Many people believe that they have to wait a thousand years for Nan technology. Self-evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………….............. ................................................................................................................................................................ Date of planning: 22/10/2016 Date of teaching: …../10/2016 Period: 30 , week : 10, class: UNIT 5: TECHNOLOGY AND YOU I. CONTENT: SPEAKING (Part B: SPEAKING - Task 1,2) II. OBJECTIVES 1. Educational aims: By the end of this lesson, Ss are able to: - Ask and answer questions about the uses of modern inventions such as: radio, TV, fax machine, electric cooker, air conditioner…. - Talk about the uses of modern technology in daily life 2. Skills: Integrated skills: Main skills : Speaking, Reading Sub-skills : Writing, listening 3. Attitude: Students will understand the use of modern inventions (computer, electric devices…) 4. Orientation of competence development - General competence: self-study, solving problems, critical thinking, independent, communicative and cooperative competences. - Specific competences: improving speaking skills by using structures: be used to/ for; allow s.o to do s.th to express the uses of modern inventions III. Methods, teaching techniques, teaching organization and teaching aids + Methods and teaching techniques: discussion, eliciting, communication + Teaching organization: individuals, pairs, groups, class… + Teaching aids: pictures, colored chalks, workbook, IV. TEACHING PROCEDURES:. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 76. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(77) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School I-Stabilization: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance. II-Checking: Asking a student to read the passage, answer T’s questions: What can a computer do to help us in our daily life? Answer: A computer can helps us visit shops, offices and places of interests, pay bills, read newspapers, receive letters, and learn foreign languages.. III- New lesson: Content WARM-UP: Odd one one Chair- table- sofa- Television Key: Television because it is one of the modern Inventions Alternative warm-up: Jumbled word Key: MOBILE PHONE (CELL PHONE) Question: What are other modern inventions? Pre-speaking: TASK 1: Useful structures used to ask and answer qs + S+ be used for+ V-ing the use of something + S+ be used to + V Example: We use an electric cooker for cooking rice.  An electric cooker are used for cooking rice. Model: A: Can/Could you tell me what a cell phone is used for? B:Well, it is used to talk to people when you are away from home Expected conversations: 2. Can/could you tell me what a TV is used for? -Well, It’s used to watch football matches, and TV game shows. 3. Can/could you tell me what a fax machine is used for? -Well, it’s used to send and receive letters quickly. 4. Can/could you tell me what an electric cooker is used for? -Well, it’s used to cook rice and keep rice warm. 5. Can/could you tell me what an air conditioner is used for? -Well, it’s used to keep air cool when it is hot and keep air warm when it is cold. While speaking: TASK 2: Sentence Completion some new words 1. Transmit (v) /trænz’mit/ 2. Receive (v) /ri 'siv/: 3. Process (v) /prəˈses/ 4. Store (v) /‘stɔ:r/: 5. Hold (v) /həuld/: 6. Design (v) /di‘zain/: -Expected answer: 1.store 6.make 2.transmit 7.send. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Teacher’s activities T asks sts to odd one out and explain T asks a question. - T elicits the expressions after asking sts read the sample dialogue in the textbook T explains some new words in tasks 1 and instruct how to make dialogue. Students’ activities Say out the odd one and explain Sts list some modern invention Sts say out the structures. substitute the underline phrases in the model. Competences K3 Understanding the modern inventions. K1 Presenting the structures. K2 Practicisng the dialogue as model Sts may develop pair-work activities to talk about the use of some modern inventions. - T explain some new words - T asks SS to listen and repeat -T keeps Ss in pairs and asks them to complete the sentences by using the words in the box. - T asks Ss to work in pairs to study the sentences carefully before deciding which words to. 77. Sts take notes Listen and repeat after T work in pairs to study the sentences carefully before deciding which words to be used.. K3, P3 Completing sentences Sts can recognize the meaning of words Sts can talk about the use of information technology. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(78) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 3.process 4.send 5.hold. 8.receive 9.design. Post speaking: Task 3: Work in groups: Suggestion: A: Do you think information technology is very important to our lives? B: Yes, I think so because àit helps us store… àit allows us to transmit .../process .... C: Yes, I think so because àit helps us send.. àit allows us to make....../hold Question: What kinds of modern inventions do you have in your family? 1. What is it used for? IV-Consolidation: Main points of the lessons V-Homework - Learn new words by heart - Prepare UNIT 5:Lesson 3:LISTENING. be used. -Give correct answers; T asks sts to work in groups to discuss the questions. work in groups to discuss the questions. Sts can talk about the uses of information technology T summarises the uses of modern inventions T gives homework. Sts listen/ retell the main points of the lesson. Recalling what they’ve learnt. V. Questions of evaluating students’ competences 1. Table of description of competence level. Levels Topic Reading. RECOGNITION Vocabulary: 9 words from the 2nd and 3rd paragraph about some kinds of machine that a computer can function. UNDERSTANDIN G Task 2: answer the questions by using the cues given in the spoken form. APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATION APPLICATION Task 3: Find the best Talk about the other title uses of computers. 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises A. Recognition: 1. Could you tell me what the radio is used ………..? Well, it’s used ……. listen to the news and learn foreign languages. A. for/ to B. to/ for C. of/ to D. on/ to 2. Electric cooker is used to ……… rice, meat, fish and ………..food, rice warm. A. to cook/ keep B. cook/ keep C. cooking/keeping D. to cook/ keeping B. Understanding, Low and High application: Game: What is it? 1. It is used for making exact copies of documents.( A photocopier) 2. It is a machine which keeps air cool or warm when it is hot or cold. (An air conditioner) 3. It is a machine which is used for keeping food fresh.(a fridge) 4. It is used to cook rice, meat, fish and vegetables or keep the food warm.( An electric cooker) 5. They are used to copy the information from a computer to paper. (printers) 6. It is used to boil water faster.( An electric kettle) 7. It is used to wash clothes.(a washing machine) 8. It is used to record moving pictures and sound.(a camcorder) 9. It is used to listen to news and music.(A radio) 10. It is used to watch news, performances and football matches…(a TV) Talk about the uses of the modern invention that students like, but the speaker will talk some wrong sentences about the uses of it. Other students write and speak the wrong sentences. For example: Speaker: Tv is used to watch the news. It is also used to cook the meal………….. Evaluation: ............................................................................................................................................................... Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 78. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(79) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Tổ trưởng ký duyệt tuần 10 Ngày 24 tháng 10 năm 2016. Hứa Thị Hoài Thanh. Date of planning: 22/10/2016 Date of teaching: …../10/2016 Period: 31 , week : 11, class: UNIT 5: TECHNOLOGY AND YOU - Part C: Listening Allocated time: 45 minutes I. CONTENT Unit 5: Technology and you- Part C: Listening II. AIMS 1. Knowledge Students will be able to: - improve listening skills through True or False and gap-filling exercises. - master some words: camcorder, refuse, headache, excuse, memory, shy. 2. Skills: Integrated skills 3. Attitude: It aims to help students appreciate the modern computers that help make our life comfortable and know how to use them properly and economically. 4. Competences: - General competences: communication, teamwork, self-esteem and self-study. - Specific competences: Students can use the language appropriately to communicate in authentic, social and school environment. III. METHOD, TECHNIQUES AND TEACHING AIDS 1. Method: Integrated, mainly communicative. 2. Techniques: individually, pair work and group work. 3. Teaching aids: blackboard, chalks, cassette, handouts and textbook. IV. PROCEDURES 1. Check-up: (5 mins) Unit 5: Technology and you (part B: speaking) 2. Warm up and lead in: (3 mins) - T asks Ss some questions: 1. Which electrical appliances do you know? Use pictures 2. What are they used for? - Sts answer the questions. Expected answers: 1. TV, radio, refrigerator, telephone, washing machine or computer. 2. A fridge is used for keeping food and vegetables fresh. A computer is used for storing information. - T gives feedback and leads to the lesson: Unit 5: Technology and you – Part C: Listening 3. New lesson:. III- New lesson: Content I. Pre-listening: (10 mins) Question: How often do you use each of. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Teacher’s activities - Has Ss look at the book and answer the questions: How often do you use each. 79. Students’ activities - Answer the questions.. Competences Recognition Understanding some words in the. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(80) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School electrical appliances? Expected answers: +Very often: radio, computer, TV +Sometimes: camcorder, cell phone +Never: fax machine Vocabulary: + refuse (v) + headache (n) + excuse (make an excuse) + memory (n) + shy (adj) II. While-listening: (25 mins) 1. Task 1: True/False (12 mins) Expected answer: 1. F (He wasn’t worried) 2. T 3. T 4. F (He understood about computer and became the man’s teacher) 5. F (He didn’t understand the lesson well) 6. F Answer question (6mins) 1. What did the man’s son buy? 2. When did the man become worried? 3. What happened to the man’s memory? 4. What did the man suggest? Expected answers: 1. He bought a computer. 2. The man became worried when his secretary asked him for a computer in the office. 3. His memory refused to learn. 4. The man suggested they should have the lesson until another day. 2. Task 2: Gap-filling (7 mins) Expected answers: 1. invited 2. still 3. refused 4. excuse 5. anything. III. Post-listening:(6 mins) Fill in the blanks to complete the summary The story is about an old man who doesn't know how to use the computer. He became (1) _____ when his (2) ________ asked him for a computer in the (3) _____. He decided to take some (4) _______ lessons. His son (5) _________ about computer and he became his (6) ______. His son was (7) _____ but he didn't understand at all. After a few (8) _____ he began to feel (9) ____ and he made an (10) _______, saying that he had a headache. Finally, he didn’t learn computer.. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. of electrical appliances? - Pre-teaches some words.. tape K1,P1. - Listen and take notes.. - Reads the above words and has Ss repeat. Listen and repeat.. Asks Ss to read the statements in the book carefully. - Has Ss listen to the tape and do Task 1. -Calls on some Ss to give their answers. Gives feedback.. T asks sts to focus on the questions and try to find out the answer. - Read the statements carefully. - Listen to the tape and do the task. - Gives their answers. - Give their answers.. Low application Listening and deciding the statements are true/ false P2, K1. Work in groups to answer questions Practicing answering questions P2, C1 High application Answering the questions. - Asks Ss to read a part of the talk in the book and guess the missing words. - Has Ss listen again and do the task. - Calls on some Ss to give their answers. - Gives feedback. T asks Ss to work in groups and fill in the blanks to complete the summary. read a part of the talk in the book and guess the missing words. listen again and do the task.. work in groups and fill in the blanks to complete the summary. Understanding Listening and filling in the gaps K2, P2. K3, X3 Application Completing the summary. Retell the old man’s story, beginning with the following sentence: T asks sts to retell the story using the summary. 80. Presenting the summary. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(81) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Key: 1 worried, 2 secretary, 3 office, 4 computing, 5 understood, 6 teacher, 7 helpful, 8 lessons, 9 tired, 10 excuse IV. Consolidation and homework: (2 mins). Summarises the main points of the lesson. - Asks Ss to learn new words and prepare the new lesson. V. Questions of evaluating students’ competences. Listen and prepare the new lesson. 1. Table of description of competence level. Levels Topic Listening. RECOGNITION Vocabulary: recognize new words about the man’s talk. Task 2: Students can listen and fill each blank with a suitable word. UNDERSTANDING Task 1: Students can listen to an old company director talking about his experience of learning on how to use a computer and decide whether the statements are True or False (give the evidence). APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATION APPLICATI ON Task 3: Students can After you answer questions listen: Students about the story can retell the story Answer questions and fill in the summary. 2. EVALUATING QUESTIONS: A. Recognition: 1. Doctors are ……….about the possible spread of the disease. A. worried B. worry C. to worry 2. She refused ……….. that there was a problem. A. accept B. accepting C. to accept B. Understanding: Listen and fill in the blanks. Well, I wasn’t worried when my son bought a (3)………. After all lots of children have parents who don’t understand computers. But when my ( 4 ) ………. asked me for a computer in the office, I really became (5) ………... So I decided to take some (6)………………. in computing and my (7)………… became my teacher. Key: 3. computer 4. secretary 5. worried 6. lessons 7. son C. Low and High application: Retell the man’s story, beginning the story with the following sentence: The story is about an old man who doesn’t know how to use the computer… Self-evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………….............. .................................................................................................................................................................... Date of planning: 22/10/2016 Date of teaching: …../10/2016 Period: 32 , week : 11, class: UNIT 5: TECHNOLOGY AND YOU I. CONTENTS: Language focus II. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge + Language: - The present perfect and present perfect passive for talking about the things have been done - New words: Words related to pronunciation /  / - / u: /Sequence connectors and imperative verb form often used in a set of instructions 2. Skills: - Pronunciation: /  / - / u: / - Grammar and vocabulary: + The present perfect + The present perfect passive + Relative pronouns 3. Attitude: By the end of the lesson, Ss are able to:. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 81. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(82) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School - Distinguishing the sounds /u:/ and /  / - Review the present perfect and present perfect passive 4. Competences: - General competences: communication, cooperation and self-study. - Specific competences: deal with pronunciation and using language. III. METHOD, TECHNIQUES AND TEACHING AIDS 1. Method: Integrated, mainly communicative. 2. Techniques: individually, pair work and group work. 3. Teaching aids: blackboard, chalks, cassette, handouts and textbook. IV. PROCEDURES 1. Check-up: (5 mins) Unit 5: Technology and you (part C: Listening): vocabulary and summary of the listening text 2. Warm up and lead in: (3 mins) Game : Bingo(5ms) T asks SS to write 10 words containing the sounds /ʊ/ and /u:/ T says out the expected words, any students having similar words will say Bingo Expected answer: to, two, who, shoe, book, took, could, put, school, pool… - T gives feedback and leads to the lesson: Unit 5: Technology and you – Part E: Language focus 3. New lesson:. III- New lesson:. Content. Teacher’s activities. PRONOUNCIATION: /ʊ/ and /u:/(10ms) 1. Presentation (2mins) book shoe /ʊ/ /u:/ */ ʊ/:a short sound ;/u/: U, OOT/ K, ULL, OULD(-ut(except BUT) */u:/ :a long sound / u:/: O, OOL, OE, OU, UE. 2. Practice (6mins). 1. Presentation (2mins) -Instructs sts to pronounce 2 sounds: /  / - / u: / - tells the difference between two sounds: * / /: a short sound * /u:/ : a long sound 2. Practice (6mins) - Ask students to look at the books - Turn on the cassette player or read loudly the words in the books - Ask students to repeat. * Practise the sentences - Ask students to look at their books - Turn on the cassette player or read loudly the sentences in the books - Ask students to pick out the words containing the sound /  / - / u: / - Let them work in groups - Correct the mistakes.. 3. Production (2mins) Choose the best answer: 1. A. school B. choose C. tool D. cook 2. A. pool B. moon C. food D. foot. GRAMMAR AND VOCABULARY (30ms) Presentation 1(10ms) 1. The present perfect 1.Form: +S + have/has + V(pp) +S + have /has not + V( pp) + Have/ Has+ S + V(pp) ? 2.Use: to express an action which began in the past and still continues Adverbs: just, already, never, ever, since, for, recently, already, so far, up to now, up to the. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. T gives an example by asking question: What has Nam done? I’ve/ He’s just cleaned the board. -T asks Ss to revise the form and use of the present perfect. 82. Students’ activities Look at the board and listen to the teacher - listen to the teacher. Competences. Recognition: Pronounce/  / - / u: / K1, X1 Understanding The difference between two sounds. - Read loudly K2, x2 Low application the words Read the words and the sentences - Look at the High application book. - Read loudly the - Pick out the words containing sentences - Pick out the the sound: words containing - Choose the best answer. the sound: //: could, put, K3 book, bookshelf, full, look, looking / u: /: June, moon, shoes, boot, school, afternoon revise the form and use of the present perfect. Sts can present the form and use of the present perfect K1, P1. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(83) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School present, before, after, yet, in the last few days, since breakfast, today, this morning, “for” with a period of time, “since” a point in time Exercise 1 Expected answer: 1.Tan has opened the door. 2.He has turned / switched on the TV. 3.He has tidied the house. 4.He has cleaned the floor. 5.He has turned/ switched on the lights. 6.He has laid two bottles of water on the table. 2. The present perfect passive: 1.Form:Act: S+ have/has +V(pp) +O S+ have/ has+ been + V(pp) + by O * Note: - The passive voice form of the present perfect is BEEN + V3/ed. Ex: Her father has written several books. S V O. Practice 1: Exercise 1: t asks sts to study the situation and put the verbs in the present perfect tense - Call on some Ss to give correct answers. Presentation 2(10ms) T asks sts to make a passive sentence with present perfect… 2. The present perfect passive: T elicits sts to present the form…. study the situation and put the verbs in the present perfect tense. Sts can make present perfect sentences from the given cues K1, P1. make a passive sentence with present perfect…. Sts can know how to change an active to passive voice sentences K2, X1. present the form…. Ss listen and take notes Several books have been written by her father. S V O Exercise 2 Expected answer: 1. A new hospital for children has been built in our city. 2. Another man made satellite has been sent up into space. 3. More and more trees have been cut down for wood by farmers. 4. Thousands of animals have been killed in the forest fire. 5. About one hundred buildings and houses have been destroyed in the earthquake. 6. More than 50 films have been shown in Hanoi. 7. Their hands have been washed and dried on a towel. 8. Another book has been read by the students. 9. Some ink has been spilt on the carpet. 10. She has been shown how to do it. 3. Relative Clause: WHO ,WHICH and THAT Relative person Thin function pronoun g Who X Subject Which X Object X S.O Whom Whose. X. X. That. X. X. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Possessi ve S,O. Practice 2. Exercise 2: T asks sts to build the sentences after the model. Use the present perfect passive T checks and gives feedback. build the sentences after the model. Use the present perfect passive Ss work individually. Sts can build correct present perfect passive sentences K3. T can ask sts to do 5 sentences at class, leave the rest as homework. Presentation 3 (10ms) T gives some examples about Relative clauses/ or uses a guessing game A person who teaches children at school.  A teacher A machine which can cook food. An electric cooker. T asks sts to talk about. 83. talk about relative clause. Sts can remember and distinguish the uses of 3 relative pronouns K3, P3. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(84) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School N- person+ WHO/ THAT + V N- PERSON + WHOM/ THAT + S+ V N- PERSON + WHOSE + N… N-THINGS + WHICH + V/ S+ V Practice 3 -Expected answer: 1.which 7.whom 2.which 8.which 3.which 9.which 4. who 10. who 5.who 6.who V-Homework - Do exercise 1,2,3 again or do exercises in handouts - Prepare UNIT 6: Lesson 1:READING. relative clause Practice 3: -T asks Ss to do exercise 3: Fill in the blanks with whom which or that. - Calls on some Ss to read their sentences aloud in front of the class. - Give correct answers IV-Consolidation: The Present perfect, the past perfect passive and some relative pronouns. do exercise 3: Fill in the blanks with whom which or that. read their sentences aloud in front of the class.. Remember points. Sts can complete the sentences with correct relative pronoun. main Self- study. V. Questions of evaluating students’ competences 1. Table of description of competence level. IIILevels. APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATION APPLICATION Task 3: students Consolidation: can fill each blank Make sentences with who, which, about what’s just that happened or play a guessing game: It is a thing which can tell you the time….. Topic Language focus. RECOGNITION UNDERSTANDING - Demonstrates the Task 1: students can sounds /u:/ and /  /by write the present perfect statements from the pronouncing them clearly given cues and slowly. Task 2: students can - Theory: build sentences after the + relative pronouns: + The present perfect tense model ( s1-5) (Active and passive) 2. EVALUATING QUESTIONS: A. Recognition: I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the rest. 1. A. put B. but C. pull D. full 2. A. book B. cool C. coo D. choose 3. A pulse B. skull C. cut D. put 4. A cook B. look C. shook D. loose 5. A. loose B. choose C. book D. loot Expected answer: 1. B, 2A, 3D, 4D, 5C II. Choose the best answer : 1. It is a car ______ I bought last year. A. whom B. who C. which 2. He is the man _______ son is a doctor A. whom B. which C. who 3. The concert ___________ we are looking forward is next Saturday. A. which B. that C. whom B. Understanding, Low and High application: Change into Passive voice 1. No one has solved the problem. D. whose D. whose D. A & B. 2. You have learned English well. 3. She has borrowed Minh some money 4. My mom has cooked the meal for hours. 5. Her father has sent a book for me Keys: 1. The problem hasn’t been solved.. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 84. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(85) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 2. English has been learned well. 3. Some money has been borrowed Minh. 4. The meal has been cooked by my mom. 5. A book has been sent for me. Date of planning: 22/10/2016 Date of teaching: 31./10/2016 Period: 33 , week : 11, class: UNIT 6: AN EXCURSION A. READING Allocated time: 45 minutes I. CONTENT: An excursion II. AIMS AND OBJECTIVES: 1. Educational aims: By the end of this lesson, Ss are able to: - practice extensive reading: multiple choice questions, passage comprehension and intensive reading: gap- fill - know more vocabulary about an excursion 2. Skills: Integrated skills: Main skills : Reading, writing Sub-skills : speaking, listening 3. Attitude: It aims to educate students to know some famous landscapes and create the love of traveling and discovery in students. 4. Orientation of competence development - General competence: self-study, solving problems, critical thinking, independent, communicative and cooperative competences. - Specific competences: extensive reading: multiple choice questions, passage comprehension and intensive reading: gap- fill III. Methods, teaching techniques, teaching organization and teaching aids + Methods and teaching techniques: discussion, eliciting, communication + Teaching organization: individuals, pairs, groups, class… + Teaching aids: pictures, colored chalks, workbook, IV. TEACHING PROCEDURES: 1. Stabilization: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance. 2. Check-up: 15 minute- Test MA TRẬN ĐỀ KIỂM TRA 15 PHÚT SỐ 02 HKI- năm học 2016-2017 MÔN TIẾNG ANH LỚP 10 Thời gian làm bài: 15 phút. (12 câu trắc nghiệm+ 4 câu Tư luận). MULTIPLE CHOICE 0.5 *12= 6. Part/section/ Q.no. Test items. Question levels Re. Phonetics 1. Lexis 2. Grammar. + Sound: */ ɔː/and/ ɒ /,*/u:/ and /u,/ : /e/ and /æ + stress + Vocabulary of unit 4,5 + the + adj + Used to+ V + Article + Which as a connector + word-form + Which/ who. WRITTEN FORM ( 4) 1.0*4= 4. Writing. App. 3x x 2x x x x x x x. + Transformation Who/ which Present perfect passive. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Un. 2x 2x. 85. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(86) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Total mark 16 câu = 10 điểm Percentage %. 5. 6. 5. 30%. 40%. 30%. 15 MINUTE- TEST ( ENGLISH 10. N0.2) Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the rest 1. A. more B. job C. boss D. wrong 2. A. put B. June C. full D. pull 3. A. said B. bad C. man D. pan Choose the word which is stressed differently from the rest. 4. A. computer B. transmit C. design D. memory Choose the correct answer to each of the following questions. 5. _____________is used to keep the air cool when it is hot. A. A fax machine B. An air conditioner C. A cooker D. A micro wave 6. He decided not to become a professional _________. A. photograph B. photographer C. photography D. photographic 7. Tom isn’t on the phone, _________ makes it difficult to contact him. A. that B. what C. which D. who 8. Mary didn’t _________ in Vietnam. A. used to live B. lived C. used to living D. use to live 9. A nurse is a person ____________looks after patients. A. what B. she C. who D. which 10.People who cannot see anything are called ____________. A. the poor B. the blind C. the deaf D. the dumb Choose the underlined part that needs correcting. 11.A clock is an instrument who tells you the time. A B C D 12. My house has painted since last Tuesday . A B C D Rewrite the following sentences 1. Somebody has taken my briefcase.. My briefcase ………………………………. 2.. No one has used that car for 10 years.  That car ………………………….. 3. The woman is standing over there. She is my sister. (who)  The woman………………………………………… 4. I like reading books. Books tell about different peoples and their cultures. (which)  I like……………………………… Key: 1 My briefcase has been taken. 2. That car hasn’t been used for 10 years 3. The woman who is standing over there is my sister. 4. I like reading books which tell about different peoples and their cultures. 3. New lesson: Content Fifteen minute test I. WARM – UP: Matching. Match the places with their locations Places 1. Thien Mu Pagoda 2. The One Pillar Pagoda. Locations a. DaLat b. HaNoi. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Teacher’s activities T distributes test papers and observes so that sts can’t cheat T Shows six pictures and asks sts to match the places with their locations. 86. Students’ activities Do the test within 15 ms. Competences K3,P3,x3. match the places K1 with their locations Ss are able to know some famous places in VietNam. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(87) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 3. Valley of Love c. Hue 4. Ha Long Bay d. Quang 5. Japanese Covered Ninh Bridge e. Hoi An 6. Huong Pagoda g. HaTay Expected answers: 1.c 2.b 3.a 4.d 5.e 6.g 1. Which places do you like to come best? 2. Do you usually have an excursion? When? Where? Suggested answers: + going aboard / visiting a foreign country + visiting friends/ relatives + travelling to cities/ travelling through their own country by car or train Lead – in: T introduce new lesson Today, We are going to read a letter from Lan to her friend, Minh about her plan to have an interesting excursion to cave near HaNoi. II. PRE - READING Activity 1: Brainstorming. Activities when you have some days off. Activity2 : Teaching vocabulary Teaching Vocabulary -excursion ( n) [iks’kə∫n] = picnic: Chuyến dã ngoại , thăm quan - come to an end (exp) [kʌm tə ən end] = finish :Kết thúc - day off ( n): = holiday: Ngày nghỉ - cave /keiv/(n) : Hang động - rock formation / rɒk fɔ:'mei∫n / (n) : sự hình thành đá - Pagoda /pə'goudə/ (n): chùa - Campfire /'kæmp,faiə/ (n) : lửa trại - permission (n) [pə'mi∫n] =allowance:Sự cho phép -> Permit (v) : - Persuade /pə'sweid/ (v) : thuyết phục - destination: điểm đến III. WHILE - READING TASK 1: Multiple choice Suggested answers: - 1c , 2. d , 3. a. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. - T goes around the class and ask Ss Qs. X1, P1. Answer qs. - Ask Ss to work in group and answer the questions what activities do you often do when you have a few days off. T ask Ss to list some activities -T give feedbacks. work in group and answer the questions what activities do you often do when you have a few days off.. Ss are able to know some famous places in Viet Nam K2, P1 Ss are able to get to know the meaning of some new words and pronounce them correctly. K1, P1. T introduces some new words. - T asks Ss to read the new words in chorus and individually. read the new words in chorus and individually. -T introduces the task and asks Ss to read a letter silently T asks sts to work in pair and choose the best answer A,B,C or D to complete each of the sentences - T tellS Ss to compare their answers with a friend. - T Calls on some Ss to read and explain their answers in front of the. 87. read a letter silently. work in pair and choose the best answer A,B,C or D to complete each of the sentences compare their answers with a friend. read and explain. Ss are able to improve their pair-working skill; Understand the meaning in each sentence. K2, X2 Ss are able to improve their pair-working skill; get the. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(88) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School class. - T give correct answers: T Asks Ss to work in pairs and answer the questions. - T calls on some pairs to act out the activity in front of class - Check their answers. their answers in front of the class.. IV. POST - READING: TASK3 : Summary Completion Expected answers: 1. going to make 2. some caves 3. want to see 4. have learnt 5. their trip 6. only problem 7. to persuade them 8. her classmates. T has Ss to work in groups and fill in each blank with a suitable group of words from the text. - Sts exchange their paper into another group to correct mistakes. - T ask Ss to look at the board and correct. - T gives feedback.. work in groups and fill in each blank with a suitable group of words from the text.. - Ss are able to improve their team-working skill; recall the main ideas then complete a summary of the passage. K2, p2. V. CONSOLIDATION - Summarize the main points. VI. HOMEWORK - Learn the new words by heart. - Prepare next part: Unit 6: Speaking. T summarizes the main points.. Ss Learn the new words by heart. - Prepare next part: Unit 6: Speaking. Self- study. TASK 2: Answer the questions Suggested answers: 1. After the 1st term ends 2. Because they have recently studied rock formations and many of them have never been inside a cave. 3. It’s only over 20 km. 4. They are going to make a two-day trip and have a night campfire. They are bringing their own food and sharing buses with some other classes to make the trip cheap. 5. Lan is anxious about her parent’s permission. They may not want to let her stay the night away from home.. work in pairs and answer the questions. Write answers on the board. main ideas and apply the structures they’ve learnt to answer the questions. K2, P2. V. Questions of evaluating students’ competences 1. Table of description of competence level Theme An excursion. Recognition Matching the photos with the information Word form or family words. Understanding Multiple-choice questions. Low application Passage comprehension. High application Summary completion. 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises A. Recognition: Choose the best answer: 1. I work from Tuesday to Saturday, and Sunday and Monday are my days ............... A. in B. out C. at D. off 2. You are not allowed to camp here without ................ A. permission B. persuasion C. protection D. decision 3. We have recently studied rock ............... A. form B. formation C. forming D. format B. Understanding: Task 1: True / False statements: 1……………Minh and his friends want to have a holiday before taking the exam. 2. …………..When they travel to Thay Pagoda, they can visit some caves nearby. 3. …………..The caves near Thay Pagoda are closed forever. 4 ………….. They will have a campfire when going on an excursion. 5. ………….They are going to make a two-day trip.. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 88. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(89) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Task 2: Choose the best answer: 1. Lan wrote this letter to ………………….. A. invite Minh to go on an excursion B. complain about her parents C. to tell Minh about the plan for her class trip D. ask for Minh’s help 2. The students decided to go on an excursion because they wanted to ………………….. A. have a campfire B. relax and understand their geography lessons C. play games together D. bring food and share buses 3. The students changed their destination because ………….. A. they prefer Huong Pagoda B. many of the have been to Thay Pagoda C. it costs them a lot to visit D. it is impossible to visit the caves near Thay Pagoda 4. Lan is anxious about …………….. A. her homework B. her exam C. her friends D. her parents’ permission 5. He …………..to an end if he carries on like that. A. put B. come C. take D. reach 6. Because we have just finished the final exam, we’ll have three days …………. A. on B. of C. for D. off 7. Next year, we will have a ……………..trip to Dalat. A. day-four B. four-day C. days-four D. four-days C. High application: Retell about what Lan and her friends are going to do. Self-evaluation: ............................................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................................................... Tổ trưởng ký duyệt tuần 11 Ngày 31 tháng 10 năm 2016. Hứa Thị Hoài Thanh. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 89. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(90) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School. Date of planning: 06/11/2016 Date of teaching: …../11/2016 Period: 34 , week : 12, class:. UNIT 6: AN EXCURSION - Part C: Listening Allocated time: 45 minutes I. CONTENT An Excursion - Part C: Listening II. AIMS 1. Knowledge Students will be able to: - Get specific information about a picnic. - Improve their listening skills through number, fill in gaps and answer the questions. - Summarise the main ideas of the listening passage. 2. Skills: - Listening to a short talk about a picnic 3. Attitude: Help ss to know how to listening for specific information. 4. Competences: - General competences: communication, cooperation and self-study. - Specific competences: know how to listening for specific information. III. METHOD, TECHNIQUES AND TEACHING AIDS: 1. Method: Integrated, mainly communicative. 2. Techniques: individually, pair work and group work. 3. Teaching aids: blackboard, chalks, handouts, cassette and textbook IV. TEACHING PROCEDURES: 1. Check-up: (5 mins) Unit 6: An Excursion – Part A: Reading (vocabulary, content of the test: ask and answer qs) 2. Warm up: (5 mins) * Warm up & lead in: Prepare a table with questions and YES /NO… Let Ss practice with four Ss around their seats DO YOU… 1 2 3 4 5. Like to go for a picnic? Go with…? Go to the beach? Go to the mountain? Do you go by bus?. 6. Do you bring food?. Name (yes). - T leads to the new lesson: Unit 6: An Excursion - Part C: Listening. 3. New lesson: Content I. Pre-Listening (5 mins) + Do you often go for a picnic? + When is the most important time for a picnic? + Why do many people go picnic Suggested answers: 1. Yes, I do 2. + At weekends + On holidays (Summer holiday, Christmas, New Year, …) + When the weather is fine 3. + To relax after work + To enjoy good weather and fresh air + To feel close to the nature I. Vocabulary. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Teacher’s activities Pre listening - Ask Ss to work in pairs and discuss the following questions. ? - Write all the new words on the board. - Explain the word in many ways. - Read the words as models.. Students’ activities. Competences Recognition: - Work in pairs and Understand discuss the some words in following the tape questions. X1, k1. - Write all the new words - Listen - practice. 90. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(91) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School + glorious ( a) /'glɔ:riəs /: beautiful, shining: rực rỡ + assemble (v) = gather + left-over (n) :/ 'left'ouvəz / thức ăn còn thừa + delicious (a) : tasty + Botanical Garden / bə'tænikəl 'gɑ:dn / (n) Vườn bách thảo + destination / ,desti'nei∫n / điểm đến + spacious (a) 'spei∫əs : large, have a lot of space + sleep soundly (v) : to be in deep sleep: ngủ say II. While listening: 1.Task 1 – picture ordering (5 mins) Prompts: picture a: beautiful day, shining; p. b: on a bus, singing; p.c: take photos, in the garden; p.d: have meal, rest; p.e: at school gate, wait; p.f: play guitar, dance… Expected answers: 1–a 2–e 3-b 4-c 5–f 6–d 2. Task 2 Gap –filling (7 mins) Expected answers: 1. The weekend picnic I enjoyed most was just a few weeks ago. 2. My class decided to pay a visit to the Botanic Garden. 3. We assembled at the school gate on time. 4. We made a short tour round the garden. 5. In the afternoon we went on playing some more games Task 3 Answering questions (8 mins) 1. The weather was very nice. 2. Yes, it was. 3. The garden was beautiful. 4. They could sleep soundly because it was so peaceful and quiet in the garden. 5. They took pictures, played games, talked, sang and danced. III.Post listening (5 mins) The plan include:. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. pronouncing the words.. Task 1: – picture ordering - Ask Ss to work in pairs and study the pictures carefully. - Make sure Ss have the ideas about the pictures and they can tell the differences among them. - Have Ss listen to the tape and number the pictures in the order they hear. Let Ss to do the task in pairs - Play the tape more than once if necessary. - Call on some Ss to explain their answers in front of the class. - Give feedback. Task 2: Gap –filling - Ask Ss to read sentences and have a guess of the missing words. - Have Ss listen again and do the task in pairs. - Play the tape. - Calls on some pairs to give their answers. - T goes around and help them - Give feedback.. - Do as told. - Listen and do the task.. Recognition Listen and number pictures (Task 1) X2, p2. - Give their answers. - Listen and correct.. Task 2: Gap – filling - Listen and correct. Understanding Gap - filling (Task 2) K1,p1. - Play the tape again and ask Ss Task 3 Answering to answer the questions questions independently. - Have Ss compare their answers with a friend. - Call on some Ss to read a loud their answers in front of the class.. Low application Listen and answer the questions (Task 3) X2, k2. Ask Ss to work in groups of - work in groups of three to four and make out the three to four and plan for the picnic this make out the plan. High application - make out the. 91. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(92) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Destination: Botanical garden Means of transport: bus How many: How long: Who with: What activities: Bring any food?. weekend. for the picnic this - Go around the class and weekend. provide help if necessary. Comment and make necessary corrections.. plan for the picnic - retell the story about the picnic X3,k3, p3. T asks ss to: - Listen and take IV. Consolidation and homework + Learn vocabulary by heart. notes. (5 mins) + Practice listening more at home. V. DESCRIPTION ON THE COMPETENCES Theme Recognition Understanding Low application High application Listening to a short Understand some Gap - filling Listen and answer - Make out the talk about a picnic words in the tape (Task 2) the questions plan for the picnic Listen and number (Task 3) - Retell the story pictures about the picnic (Task 1) VI. EVALUATING QUESTIONS: A. Recognition and Understanding: 1.Don’t throw away the …………We can have them for supper. ( sundeck, photos, food, leftovers ) 2. The cottage is surrounded by the most glorious countryside. ( ordinary, honourable, beautiful, gloomy ) 3. Oh, Sue ! Welcome back ! You’ve got a nice ………….( sunburnt, sunshine, sunlight, suntan ) 4. Is it OK if we meet at 9.00 ? Is the time … for you?(convenience,convenient,conveniently,inconveniently) 5. She was born and grown up in a picturesque fishing village in Ha Long Bay.(pretty, dangerous, poor, wealthy 6. We intend to have a ……………around Europe but our mother prefer visiting Vietnam and China. (fourteen days trip, fourteen day trip, fourteen-day trip, trip in fourteen days ) 7. We spent an ……………..….afternoon visiting all the caves near Huong Pagoda. ( enjoyed, enjoyable, enjoyably, enjoyment) 8. Traveling by air is ……………than by train. ( much faster, more faster, much more faster, more fast) 9. In order to make it ………….( happy, expensive, easy, difficult ) for you, we will contact by emails. 10. You are going to leave for Paris on Sunday, ………? ( aren’t you, don’t you, won’t you, haven’t you ) B. Low and High application:( Hand outs) Summarise the listening passage, using the following suggestions. When? Where? How was the Botanical Garden? What did they do? How do they feel? * The weekend picnic I enjoyed most was just a few weeks ago. My class decided to pay a visit to the Botanical Garden. It was a glorious Sunday. We met at the school gate on time and travelled to the Botanical Garden by bus. It was a long way to destination and we sang merrily all the way. The Botanical Garden was a very beautiful place. We make a short tour round the garden and took some pictures of the whole class. Then we played a lot of games on a spacious piece of grassland. One of the boys brought along his guitar and we sang our favourite songs. We laughed, talked and danced, too. After a delicious meal with various kinds of food that we brought, we all took a rest. Some of us slept very soundly because it was so peaceful and quite there. In the afternoon, we went on playing some more games. Then we packed up the left-overs and returned home. We all felt happy. Self-evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………….............. ..................................................................................................................................................................... Date of planning: 06/11/2016 Date of teaching: …../11/2016 Period: 35 , week : 12, class:. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 92. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(93) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School UNIT 6: AN EXCURSION - Part D: Writing Allocated time: 45 minutes I. CONTENT An Excursion - Part D: Writing a confirmation letter II. AIMS 1. Knowledge Vocabulary: request, confirmation, trip, respond, bunches of bananas, wildlife 2. Skills: - writing a confirmation letter responding to a request and an invitation. 3. Attitude: Help ss to know how to write a confirmation letter responding to a request and an invitation. 4. Competences: - General competences: communication, cooperation and self-study. - Specific competences: know how to write a confirmation letter responding to a request and an invitation. III. METHOD, TECHNIQUES AND TEACHING AIDS: 1. Method: Integrated, mainly communicative. 2. Techniques: individually, pair work and group work. 3. Teaching aids: blackboard, chalks, handouts and textbook. IV. PROCEDURES 1. Check-up: (5 mins) Unit 6: An Excursion – Part C: Listening: vocabulary and answering questions about listening content 2. Warm up: (5 mins) * Warm up & lead in: Network - Divide the class into small groups. - T asks Ss to brainstorm about kinds of LETTER Bussiness Friendly Invitation Apology Thank you LETTER Complaint Love Confirmation Get well - T leads to the new lesson: Unit 6: An Excursion - Part D: Writing a confirmation letter. 3. New lesson:. content I. Pre-Writing: (5 mins) The definition of request and confirmation letters. Request: is the letter that asks for information for help. Confirmation: is the letter that responds to the request. It confirms whether the help is provided or the information is available or not. II. While-writing: 1.Task 1 (5 mins) Finding Requests and confirmation in two letters Presenting vocabulary + to pick someone up;(v) + to be convenient for (exp) + Let s.one have an early + reply: meaning -Expected answer: Request: Can you go shopping with me to buy the things we need for the trip?. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Teacher’s activities -T asks: When do you write a request letter? When do you write a confirmation letter? - T explains the definition of request and confirmation letters.. Students’ activities - Listen and take notes.. Competences Recognition: Understand format of a confirmation letter K1, x1. Task 1-T asks Ss to work individually Read the two letters and find out the request and confirmation in Nga’s letter and confirmation in Hoa’s letter. -T calls on some Ss to read their answer. - T listens and checks them. - The whole class read two letters silents -Ss read their answers - Listen to T's eliciting and copy down. Understanding Find the requests and the confirmation in the 2 letters (Task 1). 93. X1, k1. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(94) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Confirmation: Certainly, I will help you to prepare everything you need for the trip. Useful language + I am glad / happy to receive/ join/ know........next Saturday. + Certainly , I will help you to ................everything for..... + I am willing to help you ......for.. + Firstly , let me congratulate you on your 15th birthday. + I look forward to seeing you soon. + I will be waiting for you tomorrow . ......................... 2. Task 2 Reading two situations in the textbook (15 mins) Expected answer: + Mary asks you to buy some fruits and bring them to her house. + John wants to borrow you a book about wildlife. Expected answer: 1. Dear Mary, Firstly, let me congratulate you on your 15th birthday. Certainly, I will help you to prepare everything you need for the party. I will go to the nearby market and get them on Saturday morning. Luckily, Saturday is weekend do I have the whole day free. 2 Dear John, I’m happy to tell you that the book you want to borrow is available. You can use this for the next two weeks. However, I will not be at home this Saturday. Can you come on Sunday? I will be waiting for you all day. See you then, Yours, IV. Consolidation and homework: (5 mins). - T asks Ss to read two situations in the textbook and explain the request in both two letters. - Choose one situation that they want to write and make an outline first. - T goes around and help them. - Work in groups read two situations in the textbook and explain the request in both two letters.. Low application Write a confirmation letter with guidelines K2, x2. - Ask Ss to exchange their exchange their writing writing with another group. with another group. - Pick up some writings to - Listen. check in front of the class as a whole.. K3, x3,p3. - Gives feedback.. - Summarises the main points of the lesson. - Asks Ss to do the exercise in the handout, learn new words and prepare the new lesson. V. DESCRIPTION ON THE COMPETENCES Theme Recognition Understanding Writing a Understand format Find the requests and confirmation letter of a confirmation the confirmation in letter the 2 letters (Task 1). - Listen and take notes.. Low application Write a confirmation letter with guidelines. High application Write a confirmation letter without guidelines. VI. EVALUATING QUESTIONS: A. Recognition and Understanding:. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 94. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(95) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School A confirmation letter which contains 10 mistakes, find out the mistakes and correct them. Dear Peter, I receives your letter requests the details of the apply from for the video library. I enclose here the full form and you ask to fill out before send back to us. You can send we via e-mail. The deadline is 25th July. You should remember attaching a photon the first page of the form. The membership fee are $ 25 per year and it is not refund if you leave the library for any reasons. I am looking forward to hear from you soon. Yours truly, Director Mistake correction 1. receives  have received 2. requests  requesting 3. apply  application 4. ask  are asked 5. send  sending 6. we  us 7. attaching  to attach 8. are  is 9. refund  refundable 10. hear  hearing B. Low and High application:. Write a reply to the following letter of invitation. Hi, guys We'll have a potluck on Sunday at 8.a.m in Mai's house. Welcome all of you to the party with all laughter. A reply say YES two days before the party. OK? See you. A03 Self-evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………….............. .................................................................................................................................................................... Date of planning: 06/11/2016 Date of teaching: …../11/2016 Period: 36 , week : 12, class: UNIT 6: AN EXCURSION - Part E: Language Focus 1 Allocated time: 45 minutes I. CONTENT An Excursion - Part E: Language Focus I. AIMS 1. Knowledge: + Language: - Pronunciation: : /ə:/ and /ə/ - Review the future tenses 2. Skills: Integrated skills 3. Attitude: - Students can distinguish the sound /ə:/ and /ə/ and pronounce them correctly. - Students revise the future tenses. 4. Competences: - General competences: communication, cooperation and study themselves. - Specific competences: the way how to pronunce: /ə:/ and /ə/, use the future tenses correctly. 5. Method: Integrated, mainly communicative II. PREPARATION Teacher: blackboard, chalks, and textbook Students: chalks, charts III. PROCEDURE Content Teacher's activities Students' activities WARM-UP:(5ms) - T asks Ss to pick out the pick out the word whose underlined part is word whose underlined part is - The whole class different the others different the others - Some Ss read their 1a.award b.thaw c.claw d.draw Demonstrates the sounds /ə:/ answers aloud. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 95. Competences Recognition Demonstrates the sounds /ə:/. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(96) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 2a.writer d.reserve 3a.earn 4a.today. b.term. c.preserve. b.bird b.nurse. c.fir c.from. d.other d.of. Expected answer: 1A 2.B 3.D 4.B Content 1: pronunce: /ə:/ and /ə/ PRONUNCIA TION: (10ms) PRESENTATION 1 : - /ə:/ first pronounce the sound / ə / then put your tongue forward and up a little. - /ə:/ is a long sound. - /ə /:first pronounce the sound /ə:/ but make is short. - /ə /:is a short sound Note :minimal pairs /ə/ /ə:/ was were some sir does dirt from fir. PRACTICE 1 :. Content 2: Review the future tense: GRAMMAR AND VOCABULARY::(25ms) PRESENTATION 2: Form and use: a.S+ will/ shall -bare infinitive -> talking about St coming out the moment at speaking diễn tả 1 quyết định ngay lúc nói, 1 lời hứa, lời yêu cầu, 1 dự đoán trong tương lai b.S + am/ is /are + going to + bare infinitive -> talking about something planned before the moment of speaking or something which is surely to happy soon. -> talking about prediction được dùng để diễn đạt 1 dự định hay 1 quyết định sẽ làm trong tương lai gần, được dùng để dự đoán dựa trên tình huống ở hiện tại. c.S+ am/is/are + V-ing + adverb of time with a future meaning -> talking about plan as in agenda -is used to replace to verbs:go , come, arrive in near future. được dùng để nói về 1 kế hoạch đã sắp xếp trước.. Ex: He is going to arrive at 11.30 He is arriving at 11.30. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. and /ə/ by pronouncing them clearly and slowly. -Ask them to listen and repeat several times Asks Ss to pronounce and repeat the sounds several times. Makes sure Ss are aware of the difference between the two sounds. -Ss distinguish two sound and listen to T’s elicit - Listen and repeat the words in ther textbook Whole class Listen and repeat .. Repeat the sounds several times. PRACTICE 1 : Plays the tape and asks them to repeat. Calls on some Ss to repeat the sounds clearly to class. Asks Ss to work in pairs and practice the sentences. Introduces peer correction. Goes around the class and provides help if necessary.. teacher pagoda. bird work. Whole class Review the the future tense. S + will / shall + V. X1. K1 Understandin g - The difference between the two sounds K1, p1 Low application - Practise the sounds clearly K2 High application - Practice the sentences. K3. Work in pairs and practice the sentences -Her father is learning German with a teacher.. Review the future tense: *. Form. and /ə/ by pronouncing them clearly and slowly.. Recognition - Review the future tense: The use, the form…k1, x1. *Usage: * Form. S + am/ is /are + going to + V *Usage * Form;. S + am/is/are + V-ing *Usage: Whole class and individual work Listen and take notes.. PRACTICE 2: Asks Ss to do exercise 1: Choose the best option -Ask Ss to work individually and choose the best option.Encourage Ss to give. 96. Low application - Ss do exercise 1: Choose the correct option in brackets X3, k3. - Compare their answers with a friend. - Read aloud their answers in front of the class. - give correct answers:. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(97) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Content 3: do exercise 1 answers: Choose the best option 1. are you doing 2. is getting married 3.Are you going to 4. am going to be 5. is going to. explanation. -Have Ss compare their answers with a friend. -Call on some ss to read their completed sentences. -Feedback and give correct answers Tells Ss to do the exercise carefully and then compare the answers with a friend.. 4. PRODUCTION.. CONSOLIDATION(2ms) HOMEWORK: ( 1min). join another pair to make a group and compare and discuss the answers.. PRACTICE 4: Tells Ss to work in pairs Complete the exchages, using the present progressive and "be going to ...". High application Complete the exchages, using the present progressive and "be going to ..." K3, p3. Asks Ss to join another pair to make a group and compare and discuss the answers. Calls on some Ss to explain their answers in front of the class. - Summarize the main points of the lesson. - Ask students to prepare Test yourself B. IV. DESCRIPTION ON THE COMPETENCES Theme Recognition Understanding Pronunciation: … - Identify the present progressive (with a future Grammar: meaning) and "be going to ...". Low application - Practise the sounds clearly. High application - Practice the sentences.. - Ss do exercise 3: Complete the exchages, using the present progressive and "be going to ...".  EVALUATION: Recognition: Choose the different pronunciation 1. a. ago b. girl c. fur d. nurse 2. a. dirty b. first c. term d. reader 3. a. early b. weather c. church d. work Suggested answers:. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 97. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(98) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 1. a 2. d 3.b Understanding and application a. Tom: I hear Mary is in hospital now. Jim: Really ? I (see)............. her tomorrow. b. Mary : Let’s go to the cinema tonight. Mai: Sorry. I ( help) ............my sister with her homework tonight. c. Look! It’s cloudy and windy. It (rain) ........very hard Expected answers: 1. I will see 2. I am helping 3. It is going to rain Tổ trưởng ký duyệt tuần 12 Ngày 07 tháng 11 năm 2016. Hứa Thị Hoài Thanh. Date of planning: 06/11/2016 Date of teaching: …../11/2016 Period: 37 , week : 13, class: UNIT 6: AN EXCURSION - Part E: Language Focus 2 Allocated time: 45 minutes I. CONTENT An Excursion - Part E: Language Focus 2 I. AIMS 1. Knowledge: - Review the future tenses 2. Skills: Integrated skills 3. Attitude: - Students can revise the sound /ə:/ and /ə/ and pronounce them correctly. - Students revise the future tenses. 4. Competences: - General competences: communication, cooperation and study themselves. - Specific competences: the way how to pronunce: /ə:/ and /ə/, use the future tenses correctly. 5. Method: Integrated, mainly communicative II. PREPARATION Teacher: blackboard, chalks, and textbook Students: chalks, charts III. PROCEDURE Content Teacher's activities Students' activities WARM-UP:(5ms)Guessing words - T asks Ss to pick out the - T ask Ss to guess the words from three word whose underlined part is - The whole class cues: different the others - Some Ss read their 1. a. That is a person. Demonstrates the sounds /ə:/ answers aloud b. He works with many children. and /ə/ by pronouncing them c. He goes to school everyday. clearly and slowly. 2. a. She wears uniform. -Ask them to listen and repeat b. She works in the hospital. several times -Ss distinguish two c. She takes care of the sick. Asks Ss to pronounce and sound and listen to - Sts gives feedback repeat the sounds several T’s elicit - T underline the words “teacher, nurse” times. - Listen and repeat - T asks sts to recognize the sounds and lead Makes sure Ss are aware of the words in ther to the pronunciation /ə:/ and /ə/ the difference between the two textbook Content 1: pronunce: /ə:/ and /ə/ sounds Whole class PRONUNCIA TION: (10ms) Listen and repeat . PRACTICE 1 :. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 98. Competences Recognition Demonstrates the sounds /ə:/ and /ə/ by pronouncing them clearly and slowly. X1. K1 Understandin g - The difference between the two sounds. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(99) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School. PRACTICE 1 :. Plays the tape and asks them to repeat. Calls on some Ss to repeat the sounds clearly to class. Asks Ss to work in pairs and practice the sentences. Introduces peer correction. Goes around the class and provides help if necessary.. Repeat the sounds several times. teacher pagoda. bird work. Work in pairs and practice the sentences Content 2: Review the future tense: GRAMMAR AND VOCABULARY::(25ms) PRESENTATION 2: Form and use: a.S+ will/ shall -bare infinitive b.S + am/ is /are + going to + bare infinitive c.S+ am/is/are + V-ing + adverb of time with Ex: He is going to arrive at 11.30 He is arriving at 11.30. Content 3: do exercise 2 Put the verbs in brackets.. Content 4: do exercise 3 Complete the exchanges.. Review the future tense: Whole class Review the the future tense PRACTICE 2: Asks Ss to do exercise 1: Choose the best option -Ask Ss to work individually and choose the best option.Encourage Ss to give explanation. -Have Ss compare their answers with a friend. -Call on some ss to read their completed sentences. -Feedback and give correct answers. PRESENTATION 3: Identify the present progressive or "be going to..." Demonstrates the point by analysing the example: Ex: The Browns are going to the cinema this evening. PRACTICE 3: Asks Ss to do exercise 2: Put the verbs in brackets in the present progressive or "be going to..." Tells Ss to do the exercise carefully and then compare the answers with a friend.. 4. PRODUCTION. PRACTICE 4: Tells Ss to work in pairs Complete the exchages, using the present progressive and. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 99. Whole class and individual work Listen and take notes. - Compare their answers with a friend. - Read aloud their answers in front of the class. - give correct answers: Whole class. K1, p1 Low application - Practise the sounds clearly K2 High application - Practice the sentences. K3 Recognition - Review the future tense: The use, the form…k1, x1 Low application - Ss do exercise 1: Choose the correct option in brackets X3, k3. Recognition Identify the present progressive or "be going to..." K2, p2. Listen Expected answer: 1. are going 2. are having 3. is going to catch 4. are you putting 5. is not going to give Work in pairs 1. Are you going to see it? ...I'm doing my homework 2. ...We're visiting our grandparents. 3....What's he going to do with the money?. Low application Put the verbs in brackets the present progressive and "be going to ..." K2, p2. High application Complete the exchages,. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(100) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School "be going to ..." CONSOLIDATION(2ms) HOMEWORK: ( 1min). Asks Ss to join another pair to make a group and compare and discuss the answers. Calls on some Ss to explain their answers in front of the class. - Summarize the main points of the lesson. - Ask students to prepare Test yourself B. IV. DESCRIPTION ON THE COMPETENCES Theme Recognition Understanding Pronunciati - Review the future on: tense: The use, the form… - Ss do exercise 2 - Identify the present Put the verbs in progressive (with a brackets. future meaning) and Grammar "be going to ...". ...He's going to buy a new bike. 4. ... It's going to rain soon. 5... I am going to clean them... using the present progressive and "be going to ..." K3, p3. join another pair to make a group and compare and discuss the answers.. Low application - Practise the sounds clearly - Ss do exercise 3 Complete the exchages, using the present progressive and "be going to ...". High application - Practice the sentences. - Ss do more exercises on future tense.  EVALUATION: Recognition: Choose the different pronunciation 1. A. early B. weather C. church D. work 2. A. ago B. girl C. fur D. nurse 3. A. dirty B. first C. term D. reader Understanding and application Complete the sentences with “Going to” and a Verb or Expression from the box. leave - rain - be sick - jump 1. Look at that man on the bridge! I think he _________________________________________________________ 2. I don’t feel well. I think I ______________________________________________________________________ 3. It’s so cold and looks at these clouds! I think it _____________________________________________________ 4. This film is so boring. We______________________________________________________________________ Key: 1 is going to jump, 2 am going to be sick, 3 is going to rain, 4 are going to leave Date of planning: 13/11/2016 Date of teaching: …../11/2016 Period: 38 , week : 13, class: REVISION FOR THE SECOND 45-MINUTE TEST I. CONTENT - Vocabulary, pronunciation and grammar from unit 4 to unit 6. II. AIMS 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary from unit 4 to unit 6. - Grammatical points from unit 4 to unit 6. 2. Skills: Integrated skills (use of English, and writing) 3. Attitude: Students will be able to use:  The + Adj  Used to + Inf  Which as a connector  The present perfect in active and passive  Relative pronouns: who, which, that  The present progressive (with a future meaning). Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 100. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(101) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School  Be going to  Vocabularies (related to Special education, Technology and you, An excursion) in communication. 4. Competences: - General competences: communication, cooperation and self-study. - Specific competences: deal with doing exercises: multiple choice, transformation, write a confirmation letter. III. METHOD, TECHNIQUES AND TEACHING AIDS 1. Method: Integrated, mainly communicative. 2. Techniques: individually, pair work and group work. 3. Teaching aids: blackboard, chalks, cassette, handouts and textbook. IV. DESCRIPTION ON THE COMPETENCES Theme Recognition Understanding Low application High application Revision Phonetics, Vocabulary, Grammar, writing Sentence unit 4, 5, 6 vocabulary, grammar, writing Transformation grammar, writing Writing a confirmation letter V. PROCEDURES 1. Check-up: (5 mins) Some lexical items. 2. Warm up: (3 mins) - T has Ss give the grammatical points they have learnt from unit 4 to unit 6. - Ss answer the questions. Expected answers: 1. The present perfect (active and passive) 2. The + Adj 3. Used to 4. Relative clauses: Which, Who, That 5. Be going to / presnt progessive 6. The present progressive (with a future meaning) - T leads to the new lesson.. 3. New lesson:. Content (Warm-up: Jumbled words Computer, technology. Education, excursion. Trip… Pre-practice: Presentation: I. Vocabulary: definitions, unique expressions, synonyms or antonyms Topics: Special education, technology and an excursion II. Pronuncation: */o:/ and/ o / */u:/ and /u/ */ə:/ long sound (-ir-, -ear-) and /ə / short sound (Verb+er/ə/) III. Grammar: - The + adjective - Used to + infinitive( note: be used to + V= be used for + V-ing) - Which as a connector - The present perfect - The present perfect passive - Who, whom, which, that - The present progressive ( with a future meaning) - Be going to IV. Writing: - Rewrite sentences without changing the meanings + Active to passive of present perfect + be used for - Rearrange the wrong order of words. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Teacher's Students' activities activities - Has Ss give - Do as told. the form and use of the following - Do the exercise. grammatical points. - Listen. - Has ss do the exercises in the - Listen and take handout. notes. Gives feedback. - Do the exercises in the handout Summarises the main points of the lesson. - Asks students to review the lesson.. Competences. recognition, understanding, low application, high application. recognition,. 101. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(102) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School II. Practice: (27 minutes) Practice: do the exercises below Production: write sentences about themselves using present perfect passive/ be going to….. understanding, low application, high application. III. Consolidation and homework: : prepare carefully for the coming test (2 minutes) Handout: Exercise 1: Multiple choice (phonetics, grammar, vocabulary) A. Recognition: I. Choose the word in each group that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the rest. 1. A. wrong B. long C. song D. lose 2. A. early B. fear C. hear D. dear 3. A. fan B. bad C. catch D. wash 4. A. house B. would C. proud D. cloud II. Choose the best answer. 1. He rushed into the burning building, ........... was very brave. A. that B. It C. who D. which 2. The government should have special policies to help the..... A. disabled B. disablement C. disability D. disable 3. The blind child ..... a great effort to learn " Braille". A. did B. made C. got D. created 4. I'd like to introduce you to Mrs. Thuy, ........ is the teacher of this special class A. which B. that C. who D. whom 5. Mrs. Thuy's class is very different ......... other ones. A. than B. from C. with D. as B. Understanding: III. Choose the best answer. 1. Now Nam has got a car. He ........... a motor-cycle. A. uses to drive B. used to driving C. used to drive D. uses to driving 2. The blind ....... unable to see anything. A. is B. are C. am D. have 3. A dumb person is the one ...... is not able to speak. A. which B. whose C. whom D. who 4. Eleven houses ....... in my village this year. A. had just been sold B. have just sold C. has just been sold D. have just been sold 5. There are a lot of black clouds in the sky. It………rain A. is going to B. will C. is going D. has gone 6. We ……..an English –speaking club next week. Would you like to come? A. have B. are having C. have had D. will have 7. On this occasion, my class is making an excursion to visit some caves near our city. A. departure B. tour C. shift D. diversion 8. Could you tell me what this device is used……….? A. of B. about C. on D. for 9. Ha Long Bay, a…….of the world, is 165 km from ha Noi A. resort B.sunshine C. wonder D. shape 10. I have been fascinated by _______ since I was at secondary school. A. photograph B. photographic C. photographerD. Photography C. Low application: IV. Choose the best answer. 1. When she lived in Asia, she …………. very little. A. got used to eating B. was using to eat C. used to eat D. is used to eat 2. He passed the exam with high grades, …………… made everybody in the family pleased. A. which B. that C. what D. it 3. We’ve already met the man ………… often appears on TV every night. A. who B. whom C. which D. what 4. The students decided to go ……….. an excursion to relax after the final exam. A. in B. at C. on D. with. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 102. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(103) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 5. I …………… tomorrow – I’ve already got my plane ticket. A. leave B. am leaving C. will leave D. shall leave 6. Look at those black clouds! It …………….. soon. A. is raining B. has rained C. will rain D. is going to rain 7. The rooms are dirty.Yes, I know. I …………. them. A. clean B. am cleaning C. will clean D. am going clean 8. He’s been busy during the last two weeks. He …………. an exam in December. A. takes B. took C. will take D. is going to take Exercise 2: Writing (RECONITION, LOW APPLICATION, HIGH APLLICATION) I. Rewrite the sentences. 1. The bus goes up Oxchard Avenue. It doesn't stop at the supermarket. → The bus………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 2. I am lazy. This annoys my parents. → I am lazy……………………………………………………………………………………………………... 3. They have built a big supper market in my home town. → A big supper market…………………………………………………………………………………………. 4. I have visited my close friends recently. → My close friends……………………………………………………………………………………………... KEY: 1. The bus which goes up Oxchard Avenue doesn't stop at the supermarket. 2. I am lazy, which annoys my parents. 3. A big supper market have been built in my home town. 4. My close friends have been visited recently. * Rewrite the following sentences with the words given: 1. Farmers have cut down more and more trees for wood. (Using The present perfect passive) àMore and more trees…………………………… 2. The students have read another book. (Using The present perfect passive) à Another book…………………………………….. 3. The street I live in is very noisy at night. This makes it difficult to sleep. (Using “Which” )  The street………………………………………… 4. The TV is used to watch news, performances….. (Using “ be used for” )  The TV ………………………………. Key: 1. More and more trees have been cut down for wood by farmers. 2. Another book has been read by the students. 3. The street I live in is very noisy at night, which makes it difficult to sleep. 4. The TV is used for watching news, performances. II. Writing a paragraph about your trip Write about your last camping trip at school The main points: + Introduction: Write one or two sentences about the time and place of the camping trip. + Body: Describe the camping trip in details: the time you set up, what activities you did, and the time you came back from the campground. + Conclusion: Write about your feelings of the trip Questions: What was the weather like that day? When and where did you have your camping trip? How did you get there? Why did you have the camping festival? Who did you go camping with? What did you prepare for the trip? How long did the trip last? What did you do at the camping site? How did you feel about the camping trip? Sample writing: Last week, I had a wonderful camping trip at my school yard. It was a big event on the Vietnamese Teacher’s Day and the 10th celebration of our school. It was a glorious weekend. First, we went camping on Thurday afternoon at the school yard, then we went home in the evening. On Friday morning, we had a wonderful celebration with many honorable guests, old teachers and old students. We watched beautiful. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 103. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(104) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School dancing performances and listened to many impressive speeches. In the afternoon, we danced, played games and had wonderful art performances by our classmates…. We all felt tired but very happy. Self-evaluation: ............................................................................................................................................................................... Date of planning: 13/11/2016 Date of teaching: …../11/2016 Period: 39 , week : 13, class: THE SECOND 45 MINUTE TEST (REVISION + LISTENING TEST) I. CONTENT Revision + Listening Test II. AIMS 1. Knowledge Students will be able to: - Do listening test. - Review reading comprehension. - Do the related exercises. 2. Skills: Integrated skills 3. Attitude: It aims to improve students’ attitude towards testing and increase their motivation for doing well in assessments. 4. Competences: - General competences: communication, teamwork, self-esteem and self-study. - Specific competences: Students can use the language appropriately to communicate in authentic, social and school environment. III. METHOD, TECHNIQUES AND TEACHING AIDS: 1. Method: Integrated, mainly communicative. 2. Techniques: individually, pair work and group work. 3. Teaching aids: blackboard, chalks, handouts and textbook. IV. DESCRIPTION ON THE COMPETENCES Theme Recognition Understanding Low application High application - Listening Test Listen and circle - Listen and circle Listen and Read the passage - Multiple choice: the correct answer the correct answer complete the form and answer the reading Vocabulary, questions reading V. PROCEDURES 1. Listening Test: - Teacher gives sts paper with listening tasks (Hand - out). - Sts read the requirements carefully. - Teacher plays the tape. - Students do the listening test. - Teacher collects sts’ paper. 2. Revision: - T gives sts hand-out with reading tasks. - T has sts read the tasks carefully. - T lets sts work in groups. - Sts read the tasks carefully and then discuss with their friends to do the exercises provided. - T corrects and gives feedback. Comment: Qua kiểm tra mức độ tiếp thu bài sau tiết học của học sinh lớp 10C1, C2, C3, C6 kết quả cụ thể như sau: Điểm Giỏi (910) Khá (78) TB (56) Yếu (3,5  4) Kém (dưới 3,5) Lớp 10c1 10c2 10c3 10C6. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 104. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(105) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Date of planning: 13/11/2016 Date of teaching: …../11/2016 Period: 40 , week : 14, class: CORRECTING TEST 2 I. CONTENT - Test (Vocabulary, pronunciation and grammar, writing) from unit 4 to unit 6. II. AIMS 1. Knowledge:  Words and phrases related to Special education, Technology and you, An excursion.  Pronounce and stress in vocabulary related to Special education, Technology and you, An excursion.  Grammatical points: from 3 units 2. Skills: Integrated skills (use of English, reading and writing) 3. Attitude: Students will recognize some mistakes in the test. 4. Competences: - General competences: communication, cooperation and self-study. - Specific competences: Correcting mistakes: multiple choice, transformation, write a paragraph…. III. METHOD, TECHNIQUES AND TEACHING AIDS 1. Method: Integrated, mainly communicative. 2. Techniques: individually, pair work and group work. 3. Teaching aids: blackboard, chalks, cassette, handouts and textbook and test papers. IV. DESCRIPTION ON THE COMPETENCES Theme Recognition Understanding Low application High application Revision Phonetics, Vocabulary, Grammar, writing Sentence unit 4, 5, 6 vocabulary, grammar Transformation grammar Writing about the last trip V. PROCEDURES. Date of planning: 13/11/2016 Date of teaching: …../11/2016 Period: 41 , week : 14, class: 10C3 Unit 7: Lesson:. THE MASS MEDIA Reading. I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, sts can update with names of some popular TV programmes and talk about their favourite programmes. 2. Skills: Integrated skills(mainly Reading skills) + Vocabuary comprehension: match words with definitions + Deciding on True or False statements + Passage comprehension 3. Attitude: It aims to educate students to watch useful TV programmes to broaden their mind and have proper forms of entertainment 4. Main points: understanding vocabulary about names of TV programmes by guessing meaning in context and passage comprehension by deciding on True or False stateents answering the question 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: knowing the way how to do tasks and improving skills  Guessing meaning in context  Passage comprehension  Scanning for specific information II. Teaching preparation. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 105. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(106) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 1. Method: Integrated, mainly communicative. 2. Techniques: individually, pair work and group work. 3. Teaching aids: projector, blackboard, chalks, handouts and textbook. III. Activities of teaching and learning Content I. WARM – UP Jumbled Words 1. N T E N I E R T-> 2. N P A E W S E R P-> 3. D O I A R-> 4. L ECL POHEN -> 5. L T E E I S O N V I -> Expected answers: 1. Internet 2. newspaper 3. radio 4. Cell phone 5. television some questions 1. What are they? 2. Have you got a TV? 3. Which programme do you usually watch? 4. Which channel do you like most? Why? Suggested answers: 1. They are THE MASS MEDIA 2. Yes 3.I usually watch VTV1,2,3… 4. I like the quiz show…. II. PRE – READING Activity 1 : Teaching vocabulary Vocabulary: - news(n) Tin tức, thời sự - cartoon (n)/ kɑ:'tu:n/ : hoạt hình → Tom and Jerry is my favourite cartoon. - comedy (n)/ 'kɔmidi/ : hài kịch - drama (n)= play /'drɑ:mə/ : kịch sân khấu - documentary / ,dɔkju'mentəri/ : phim tài liệu - weather forecast (n)/ /ˈweðə(r)'fɔ:kɑ:st/ : dự báo thời tiết - Folk Song ['fouksɔη] (n):Nhạc dân ca - Quiz show: trò chơi truyền hình Activity 2: checking vocabulary Look at the pictures and give their names.. Teacher’s activities - T ask Ss to work in groups of four and arrange these jumbled letters into a meaningful words - T give questions. Competences K I Tái hiện kiến thức. some. Answer questions. - Ss listen to T, guess the meaning of new words and take notes. - T introduce some new words, uses pictures, synonyms, antonyms, provides spelling, transcription, part of speech and Vietnamese equivalents of words - T ask Ss to read the new words in chorus and individually. Repeat the new -T reads the new words. words and asks sts to repeat(in chorus). T ask Ss to work in group - T shows some pictures and asks Ss to. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Students’ activities - Sts work in groups and rearrange these jumbled letters. 106. X2, P2 X II Sử dụng hình thức diễn tả phù hợp. Recognition Word form or family words Ss are able to get to know the meaning of some new words and pronounce them correctly. X I Làm theo mẫu diễn tả cho trước K I Tái hiện kiến thức. X1, P1 Sử dụng các phương pháp chuyên biệt Students can. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(107) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School give the programmes. - Sts give the names of each pictures. -T give feedbacks. Suggested answers: 1. drama 2. weather forcast 3. quiz show 4. cartoon 5. comedy 6. folk song II. While-reading: (25 mins). remember names of some programmes. -Ss listen to T and practice. While reading Task 1: Task 1: The words in A appear in the reading - Asks some pairs to passage. Match them with their definitions in answer. One reads the B definition. The other - Do task1: answers - Work in pairs. - Suggested answers: - Gives feedback. - Read the text 1c,2a,3d,4b carefully - Work in pairs Task 2: Decide whether the following Task2: statements are True/ T or False / F - Asks sts to read the Correct the false information text again to do the task 2 (work in pairs). Suggested answers: - Goes around the class 1/T to help them. 2/T - Asks sts to work in 3/F. The Nature Of Language is a pairs. documentary programme at 15:15 on VTV3 - Calls some pairs to 4/T answer. 5/F. VTV1 starts at 5:35 and the last - Gives feedback. programme starts at 23:30 Do task - Work in pairs. Task3: Ask and answer the following questions Lucky numbers - Suggested answers: 1. There are 5 films 2. You can watch the news at 9am, 12am, 7pm and 11pm on VTV1, 7pm on VTV3. 3. VTV2 4. The quiz show 5. You should watch VTV1 6. Football III. Post-reading: (8 mins) ROLE - PLAY - Ask and answer about the favourite Tv programmes A: Which programme do you like best? B: I like cartoon/ news best.. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Task3: - Asks sts to do task 3 (work in pairs) - Goes around the class In pairs, ask and to help them answer - Calls some pairs to answer. One asks and the other answers.. Recognition Match the words with their definitions X1, K1. Understanding Decide whether the statements are True or False X2, K2. Low application Answer the questions K2, P2, X2. - Gives feedback. - Work in groups High application - Talk in front of Discussing the TV - Asks sts to talk about class programme they one of the programmes - Work in group. like and explain . they like watching best and explain why (work - Ask the teacher in groups). when necessary. - Goes around the class. 107. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(108) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School A: Why? B: It is interesting/ informative… EX: I like Around the World best because I want to know many things in the world. IV. Consolidation and homework: (2 mins) - Vocabulary about Tv programmes - The information from Task 2 and 3. to give help where necessary. - Calls some sts to talk in front of class. - Corrects mistakes and give marks.. - Present in front of the class. - Take notes. - Take notes.. - Has Ss learn by heart: + The new words + The content of the text - Has sts prepare for the next period: Speaking - new words. IV. DESCRIPTION ON THE COMPETENCES Theme Recognition Understanding Reading Lexical items Decide whether the The mass - Word form statements are True or media - Match the words False with their definitions. Low application Passage comprehension (Answer the questions). V. EVALUATING QUESTIONS: A. Recognition: Choose the correct answer to each of the following questions. * Vocabulary 1. A________is a film made by photographing a series of changing drawings. A. Cartoon B. Drama C. Comedy. 2. The News is always__________ at 7 p.m. A in. B. on. 3. What________is on VTV3 at 8.15?. C. at. High application Discussing the TV programme they like and explain Ss are able to role play the conversation. D. Documentary D. for. A. channel B. programme C. television D. wave 4. There is a good film on TV tonight A. movie B. play C. comedy D. drama B. Understanding: Names of some TV programmes, time to watch favorite programmes C. Low and High application: Talk about one of the programmes they like watching best and explain why (work in groups). Self-evaluation: ..................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------    ---------------------------------------Date of planning: 13/11/2016 Date of teaching: …../11/2016 Period: 42 , week : 14, class: Unit 7: Lesson: I. CONTENT The Mass Media - Part B: Speaking II. AIMS 1. Knowledge. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. THE MASS MEDIA Speaking. 108. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(109) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Students will be able to: - Improve speaking skills through asking and answering questions about uses of media - Use vocabulary items related to different types of the mass media and talk about the common and distinctive features for each type 2. Skills: Integrated skills (mainly speaking) 3. Attitude: It aims to educate students to know more about common and distinctive features of each type of the mass media 4. Competences: - General competences: communication, teamwork, self-esteem and self-study. - Specific competences: Students can use the language appropriately to communicate in authentic, social and school environment. III. METHOD, TECHNIQUES AND TEACHING AIDS 1. Method: Integrated, mainly communicative. 2. Techniques: individually, pair work and group work. 3. Teaching aids: blackboard, chalks, handouts and textbook. IV. PROCEDURES 1. Check-up: Vocabulary from Reading lesson Telling what the programme on TV that you like best and the reason why 2. Warm up: (3 mins) Kim’s Game - T shows a list of words or pictures with words, asks sts to look and remember - The group who can rewrite the most correct words will win the game Suggested words: dictionary, television, film, books, magazine, radio, newspaper, Internet… - T leads to the new lesson.. 3. New lesson:. Content. Teacher’s activities - T asks Ss to work in pairs. Which of the following are the types of the mass media? Why?. PRE-SPEAKING Lead-in: Look at the things and name them. Students’ activities Sts discuss the questions and present their answers. Competenc es X2, P2 Exchanging information. - T helps Ss elicit the reason why. - T asks Ss to read these words in chorus K1, X1 Presenting words - T asks Ss to work in groups to name the things here in 2 minutes. Expected answers: 1. magazine 2. Newspapers 3. books 4. radio 5. Play 6. the Internet 7. dictionary 8. TV 9. film Activity 1: TASK 1 Find out which of the following are the types of the mass media? Why? * Mass media or mass communications refer to public institution that reports news and other stories. Mass media also keeps people updated. - Work in pairs and give their answers. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 109. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(110) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School + television + the internet + newspaper + magazine + radio Activity 2: Vocabulary: have something in common: có điểm chung feature /'fi:t∫ə:/ (n): điểm đặc trưng orally /'ɔ:rəli/ (adv): bằng miệng (through mouth) aurally /'ɔ:rəli/ (adv): bằng thính giác (through ears) visually /'viʒuəli/ (adv): bằng thị giác (through eyes) provide / prə'vaid/(v) = deliver /di'livə/ (v): chuyển tải present / pri'zent/ (v): hiển thị = show (v): receive /ri'si:v/ (v): tiếp nhận = get (v) distinctive(adj) /dis'tiɳktiv/ khác biệt WHILE -SPEAKING. TASK 2: Cross (x) in the right column Features 1.provide information and entertainment orally 2.receive information aurally 3.present information and entertainment visually. 4.receive information visually 5.present information and entertainment orally and visually 6.get information aurally and visually 7.provide/ deliver information and entertainment. The mass media TV Radio Internet book X X X X X. X. X X. X. X. X. X. X. X. - T asks sts to read through the features the types of the mass media in task 2 And decide which features of the mass media in the table and cross. X X. X. - T asks Ss to look the table and cross the types of the mass media with its features. - T goes around to help them *T asks Ss to look at the table and answer T’s questions. T: Where do you often get information? S: From TV T: What is the difference between getting information from TV and radio? S: TV presents information and entertainment visually and we receive them through eyes. - T asks Ss to practise the same dialogue that T has made in pairs - Calls on some pairs to practise again in front of class. *Substitution drills - Role- play: A: What are the different types of the mass madia? B.TV, films, books, magazines, radio, newspaper, plays, the internet A. What features do they have in common? B.Provide information and entertainment A.What are their distinctive features? B. TV presents information and entertainment visually.. POST -SPEAKING. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. T asks sts to talk. 110. - Read through the features the types of the mass media in task 2 have in common and find out some new words - Read them carefully Ss work in group and decide which features of the mass media in the table and cross - Some Ss read their answers in front of class. Work in pairs. Ask and answer about the features of the mass media - Some pairs practise a dialogue again in front of class Give. X2, P2, K2. Finding distinctive features. And common features. Practising speaking. K3, x3. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(111) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Work in groups: Talk about different types of the mass media .Ask and answer the questions in textbook. IV-Consolidation:- Retell the features of mass media Multiple choice: answers about different 1. We receive information from radio through ears. 1C, 2A, 3C types of the mass A. orally B. visually C. aurally D. usually Do media . 2. ……………presents information and entertainment orally. homework T gives exercises A. Radio B. The Internet C. Television D. Newspaper … 3. The mass media provide information and entertainment. A. receive B. get C. deliver D. watch V-Homework - Learnt vocabularies by heart - Prepare Lesson 3: LISTENING V. DESCRIPTION ON THE COMPETENCES Theme Recognition Understanding Low application High application Speaking Lexical items Expressing the main Talking about Talking about Vocabulary about some features each of the types different types of different types types of the mass media has the mass media as of the mass guided media without cues VI. EVALUATING QUESTIONS: A. Recognition: Present some types of the mass media B. Understanding: What features do the types of the mass media have in common? What are their distinctive features? C. Low and High application: What do you know about types of the mass media? Self-evaluation: .......................................................................................... Tổ trưởng ký duyệt tuần 14 Ngày 21 tháng 11 năm 2016. Hứa Thị Hoài Thanh. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 111. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(112) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Week 15, Period 43. Date of preparation: 26/11/2016 Date of teaching: /11/2016 UNIT 7: THE MASS MEDIA LISTENING. I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will know about 2 news from the radio news, they can improve their listening skill through Gap – filling and answering the questions 2. Skills: extensive listening skills + Knowing the words in the passage + Deciding on True or False statements + Passage comprehension 3. Attitude: It aims to educate students to know how to get information from the radio news about the heavy rain and the 90- year- old woman climbing the mountain. 4. Main points: two new stories about Heavy rain causes floods all over the country and 90- year- old American woman climbs Mount Whitney, listening skills 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: knowing the way how to do tasks and improving listening skills  Finding words in the listening text  Gap-fill  True/ False statements  Answering questions II. Teaching preparation 1. Method: Integrated, mainly communicative. 2. Techniques: individually, pair work and group work. 3. Teaching aids: projector, blackboard, chalks, handouts and textbook. III. Activities of teaching and learning 1. Stabilization: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.. 2. New lesson: Content. Teacher’s activities. I. Warm-up: Crossword 6ms Across 1. VTV1 ….. at 5:35 and the last programme is on at 23:30.(STARTS) 2. Which …. do you often watch? – It’s VTV1. (CHANNEL) 3. A film or a play that is intented to be funny, usually with a happy ending is……… (COMEDY) 4. We often watch news, football matches, films on…………………( TELEVISION) 5. We get information and entertainment from TV ……. our eyes and ears. (THROUGH) Down: one of the types of the mass media: Radio Ask and answer the following questions 1. How often do you listen to the radio? 2. How many hours per week do you listen to it? 3. What programme do you like listening to and why? Question to lead in: Today, we are going to listen to the two radio news to know some information about them.. T instructs sts to play the crossword game individually. II. PRE – LISTENING 10ms Teaching Vocabulary + health (n) -> healthy ( adj): sức khỏe. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Students’ activities Sts work in groups to work out the answers. Competences K III Liên kết và chuyển tải kiến thức. The group can work out the crossword first will be the winner. K II Vận dụng kiến thức. T asks questions and encourages students to answer. Work in pairs to answer questions 1. sometimes/ often/ never… The answer will be varied…. X II Sử dụng hình thức diễn tả phù hợp Ss are able to answer the questions. T uses many techniques to teach vocabulary: word. Sts give the Vietnamese equivalents of. C I : Áp dụng sự đánh giá có sẵn. 112. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(113) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School + strong (adj): khỏe mạnh + cloud (n) -> cloudy (adj) : có mây + heavy rain (n.p) ['hevi rein]: mưa lớn + cause /kɔ:z/ (v) gây ra + flood (n) /flʌd / lũ lụt + climb /klaim / (v) leo trèo + rise- rose- risen: dâng lên + view: quang cảnh Checking: Complete these sentences with the suitable words. 1. Heavy rain during the night…………………..floods in Phu Yen. 2. Although my grandmother is 85 years old, she is still………….......... 3. The rain has stopped, but it is still..........…… 4. They are going to……..…….Phu Sy ……. ……..tomorrow Answers: 1 caused, 2 healthy, 3 cloudy, 4 climb… mountain III. WHILE – LISTENING 20ms TASK1: Ticking the words you hear in the right column Expected answers: News News story 1 story 2 Healthy V Strong V Young V Cloudy V Highest V Wonderfully V. form, part of speech, pictures, translation - T ask Ss to read the new words in chorus and individually. -T checks understanding of the new words. words Ss listen to T, guess the meaning of new words and take notes.. TASK 2: Deciding on True/ False statements 1. Heavy rain has caused floods all over the country during the day.  F 2. People have left their homes because river has risen.  T 3. The old woman has climbed Mount Whitney thirty three times.  F 4. The woman climbs the mountain very often because it has kept her young and healthy.  T TASK 3: Gap-filling * News story 1 * News story 2 1. has caused floods 1. twenty third 2. have left their house 2. 4.418 3. have risen 3. California 4. two metres 4. Wonderful 5. has stopped 5. young and healthy 6. cloudy 7. strong wind. T distributes handouts Sts guess the and explains the task answers. IV. POST - LISTENING: Close your book. Recall the two news stories and answer the following questions about the news stories./ role play the conversation. T calls on some pairs act out to act out the conversation conversation. Ss are able to get to know the meaning of some new words and pronounce them correctly. - Ss listen to T and complete these sentences with the suitable words.. - T asks sts to work in pair. - T plays the tape three times for Ss listening . - T checks their answers in front of class.. T asks sts to guess the missing words - T asks sts to work in groups -T plays the tape again and ask Ss to fill in the missing words. -T calls on some Ss to read completed stories loudly.. Sts listen and tick the word they hear Sts can write the words thay can hear on the subboard. PII Sử dụng các phương pháp chuyên biệt - Ss are able to improve their pair-work; tick the words sts hearcorrectly. K1 Sts are able to check the information. read the two news stories carefully and have the guess of the missing words. K2, X2 - Ss are able to improve their pair-working skill; get the main ideas and fill in the blanks. compare their answers with a peer. the K3, X3, P3 Sts are able to improve their group-working skill; develop speaking skill. Use the answers to those questions to tell your. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 113. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(114) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School classmates about them. Chose one of the news stories only. News story 1: A: What has happened during the night? B: Heavy rain has caused floods all over the country during the night. A: Why have many people left their homes? B: Because rivers have risen A: How deep are some roads under the water? B: Two meters A: Has the rain stopped at the moment? B: yes, it has 5. Is there a strong wind? Yes, there is A: Why can’t people go out to work? B: Because of the bad weather News story 2 A: How many times has the old woman climbed Mount Whitney? B: 23 times A: How high is Mount Whitney? B: 4,418m A: Is it the highest in California? B: Yes, it is A: What does she say about the view from the top? B: She says that the view from the top is wonderful. A: Why does she climb it so often? B: Because it has kept her young and healthy. A: Does her age prevent her from climbing the mountain? B: No, she tries to climb the mountain very often. V. CONSOLIDATION - Summarize the main point. VIII. HOMEWORK - Learn the lesson - Prepare next part: Writing. T asks some pairs to act out the conversation by using the handouts from the teacher. Some pairs act out conversation using handouts from teacher. the by the the. Sts work in groups Sts choose one of the new stories and tell your classmate about it.. For advanced students, t asks them to retell the news summary. T asks sts to look back Retell the news Recalling what what they’ve learnt summary they’ve learnt and preparing for the next lesson. IV. DESCRIPTION ON THE COMPETENCES Levels Topic LISTENING. RECOGNITION Recognize and tick the information they’ve listened to in the passage.. UNDERSTANDING Listen and understand the news stories.. APPLICATION LOWAPPLICATION -Answer questions - Fill in the blank. V. EVALUATING QUESTIONS: A. Recognition: Complete these sentences with the suitable words. 1. Heavy rain during the night…………………..floods in Phu Yen. 2. Although my grandmother is 85 years old, she is still…………........... HighAPPLICATION Talk about the news stories. Answers: 1 caused, 2 healthy, 3 cloudy, 4 climb… mountain B. Understanding: Listen and decide whether the statements are True or False 1. Heavy rain has caused floods all over the country during the day. à F. 2. People have left their homes because river has risen. à T 3. The old woman has climbed Mount Whitney thirty three times. à F 4. The woman climbs the mountain very often because it has kept her young and healthy. à T C. Low and High application:. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 114. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(115) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Retell about the news stories using the answers for the given questions Self-evaluation: .................................................................................................................................... Tapesript: U7-10 The time is 7 o’clock and here is the news summary. Heavy rain during the night has caused floods all over the country today. Many people have left their homes because rivers have risen. Some roads in the north-west are under two metres of water. The rain has stopped at the moment, but it’s still cloudy and there’s a strong wind. Because of the bad weather, people can’t go out to work. A ninety-year-old woman has climbed Mount Whitney in California for the twenty-third time. At 4,418 metres, Mount Whitney is the highest mountain in California. The woman says the view from the top is wonderful, so she tries to climb it often. She also says that the mountain has kept her young and healthy. In spite of her old age, the woman tries to climb the mountain very often. -------------------------------    ---------------------------------------Class 10C…., WEEK 15 Preparation date: 20/11/2016 Teaching date: …./11/2016 Period: 59 UNIT 7: THE MASS MEDIA D. WRITING Allocated time: 45 minutes I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: : By the end of the lesson, write a paragraph about advantages and disadvantages of television and other types of mass media. 2. Skills: - practise their writing skill. 3. Attitude: - Actively take part in classroom activities; know about advantanges and disadvantages of some types of the mass media 4. Main points: paragraph about advantages and disadvantages of television 5. Competences: - General competences: self-study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized competences: Know how to write and organize ideas in a paragraph II. Teaching preparation: 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk, handouts … 2. Preparation of students: Textbook, notebook, pen… III. Activities of teaching and learning: 1. Stablization: Greeting and checking attendance 2. Checking-up: Vocabulary and questions about 2 news stories 3. New Lesson: Content Teacher’s activities Students’ Competenc activities es I. WARM – UP : Brainstorming T asks sts to - Ss brainstorm K1 Game: Brainstorming brainstorm about the about the types Sts are able types of the mass of the mass to guess the media media mass media.. . Suggested answers: 1. Television 2. . Radio 3. Newspaper 4. Magazine 5. Internet. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. -T elicit some new words and structures. 115. listen to T,. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(116) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School II. PRESENTATION TASK1: New words and structures + help + O + do / to do Sth + make + O + do st / adj Ex: He makes me tired / cry + the popularity = to be famous for -> popular ( adj) + to be aware of + to encourage (v)-> encouragous (adj) + to interfere with(v) = to prevent + Memorable (adj) ['memərəbl] = unforgettable: + Effective (adj) [i'fektiv] + Increase (v) ['inkri:s] : + Encourage (v) [in'kʌridʒ] + Violent (adj) ['vaiələnt] Task 2: Study the passage about the advantages and disadvantages of television and work out the outline: Television plays an important role to the life of people. Watching TV has a lot of advantages as well as disadvantages. Television brings us a lot of advantages. Firstly, television helps us to learn more about the world and to know and see many new things. Secondly, it can make things memorable because it presents information in an effective way. Thirdly, it entertains us. Watching it is an enjoyable way to relax. Fourthly, it increases the popularity of sport and games. Finally, television makes us aware of our global responsibilities. However, there are some disadvantages of television. First of all, television makes us passive. We don’t have to think so our brains become lazy. Another disadvantage is that it encourages us to buy things that we don’t need. In addition, it takes time away from activities such as reading and games. Furthermore, some television programmes may make people violent. Lastly, television interferes with family life and communication. In conclusion, television is neither good nor bad. Television is as good or as bad as we make it.. - T introduces some new words give some structures - T asks Ss to read the new words in chorus and individually. -Ss listen to T and practice.. guess the K2 meaning of new Ss are able words and take to get to notes. know the meaning of some new words and pronounce them correctly. T asks sts to study the passage about the advantages and disadvantages of television and work out the outline: T asks qs about the passage. Study the passage about the advantages and disadvantages of television and work out the outline: Answer questions about the outline…. X2, Ss are able to recognize the advantages and disadvantag es of each media. Ss are able to know some useful structures. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 116. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(117) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School. III. WHILE – WRITING TASK 3: Talk about advantages and disadvantages of the mass media.. Handout:. Mass media. advantag es. disadvantages. 1. Radio 2. Newspaper 3. Computer 4. The internet Expected answer: Radio: * - make people happy - Life easier /relax - get / enlarge / broaden knowledge understanding * - waste time - make people passive Newspaper: * - get information on many fields :culture, art, bussiness - relax and entertainment * - harm people eyes - Be short-sighted - Cost time and money - Make people passive Internet: * - get information on many fields - Provide quick and daily access to information and entertainment * - cost a lot of time and money - make people passive - Influence on the way people - Take time away from activites IV. POST – WRITING Sample writing Radio brings us a lot of advantages. Firstly, it increases the popularity of sports and games. Secondly, it helps us to. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. -T asks sts to work in groups to talk about advantages and disadvantages of the mass media. - T divides the whole class into four groups and discusses about advantages and disadvantages of the following mass media.. - Ss write a paragraph about advantages and disadvantages of the following mass media.. - T asks Ss to discuss and write their ideas in the handout.. - T picks up some writings to correct in front of class.. 117. K2, P2 Ss are able to improve their teamworking skill; practice writing a paragraph Sts are able to know more about the advantages and disadvanta ges of the other mass media. - Peer correction.. X3, K3 Ss are able to develop. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(118) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School learn more about the world and to know many new things. Lastly, we can listen to it almost everywhere with little cost and great convenience. However, it also has some advantages. First, it only provides information aurally. Besides, it can be boring because we can't watch films or sports programs. In addition, it encourages us to buy things that we don’t needs. In short, I’d like to say that radio is neither good nor bad. Radio is as good or as bad as we make it.. peer correction. V. CONSOLIDATION T asks sts to retell the - Summarize the main point: words about the advantages main points of the and disadvantages of the mass media, outline of a lesson paragraph, VI. HOMEWORK - Rewrite the paragraph about advantages and disadvantages of the following mass media in the notebook. - Prepare next part: Language Focus. retell the main points of the lesson. Wrapping up what they learnt. IV. DESCRIPTION ON THE COMPETENCES Levels Topic WRITING. RECOGNITION Remember the way of writing a confirmation letter. APPLICATION LOWAPPLICATION Write a completed confirmation letter. UNDERSTANDING Understand the content of writing about the informal letter. HighAPPLICATION Report the writing. V. EVALUATING QUESTIONS: What are advantages and disadvantages of the Radio A. Radio: * It makes people happy. A It can make life easier /relax. A It gets / enlarge / broaden knowledge and understanding. A * It wastes time to listen to many kinds of news. D It can make people passive. D B. Understanding: How to build up correct sentences C. Low and High application: How to write a paragraph and write a paragraph correctly Self-evaluation: ..................................................................................................................................... Class 10C…., WEEK 15 Preparation date: 24/11/2016 Teaching date: 29/11/2016 Period: 59 UNIT 7: THE MASS MEDIA E. LANGUAGE FOCUS 1 Allocated time: 45 minutes I. Objectives:. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 118. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(119) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 1. Knowledge: - know how to pronounce the sound /eɪ/, /aɪ/ and /ɔɪ/ correctly. - Pronounce the words and sentences containing these sounds correctly. - revise the present perfect and using “Because of” and “In spite of”. 2. Skills: Reading and speaking 3. Attitude: - Actively take part in classroom activities 4. Main points: Pronunciation /eɪ/, /aɪ/ and /ɔɪ/, “Because of” and “In spite of”. 5. Competences: - General competences: self-study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized competences: Know how to pronounce /eɪ/, /aɪ/ and /ɔɪ/, and how to use “Because of” and “In spite of”. II. Teaching preparation: 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk, handouts … 2. Preparation of students: Textbook, notebook, pen…. III. Activities of teaching and learning: Content I. Warm-up: Look at these pictures and answer the questions. What is this? Expected answers: bicycle – radio – toy. Teacher’s activities. Students’ Competences activities - Ask students give the - Listen to the Recognition the answers T and give sounds - Let students to get the answer KI their attention on pronunciation: /eɪ/, /aɪ/ and /ɔɪ/. Introduce new lesson.. II. Pronunciation: PRONUNCIATION Activity 1: Listen and repeat - Help Ss to distinguish these three sounds. - Instructs the way to pronounce them. - Ask the whole class listen and repeat them in chorus.. Pronouncing words containing the sounds - T reads the words in each column all at once. - T reads the words and asks Ss to repeat them. - T asks Ss to practice pronouncing the words Activity 2: Practicing sentences containing the in pairs. target sounds - T asks some Ss to - Open their textbooks and practise the sentences. pronounce the words and give correction if necessary. - T reads the sentences and asks Ss underline the words with the sound and write these sounds under them. - T asks some Ss to read the sentences and gives feedback. III. Grammar: Look at these pictures, give the situation - T writes some sentences on the board and underline because of and in spite of. - T asks Ss to comment on the rules and meaning. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 119. Sts can - Ss work pronounce the individually sounds correctly and compare X1, KIII their answer with a peer. - Ss read them in front of class Listen attentively. Practice reading the sentences which contain 3 sounds. - Take notes. Sts are able to understand the usage of “Because of” and “In spite of” PI, PII. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(120) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School. - Ask Sts to give examples. Because of the heavy rain, she stayed at home In spite of the heavy rain, she went out. 2. Form: a. Clause and phrase of reason: Because + S+ V Because of + noun/ V-ing b. Clause and phrase of concession: Although Despite Even though + S+ V In spite of + noun/ V-ing Though IV. Practice: Exercise 1: Choose the best answer to complete each sentence: 1. ___ he is very rich, he is not happy. A. although B. in spite of C. because D. because of 2. He stayed at home yesterday ___ his mother was sick. A. although B. in spite of C. because D. because of 3. ___ the large crowds, we could not see what was going on. A. although B. because of C. because D. despite 4. ___ the meat shortage, we have managed to get some beef. A. although B. because C. in spite of D. because of. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. - Ask Ss to do exercise - Do exercise 1 in pairs and then compare their answers with another student. - T calls on some Ss to read aloud their answers. - T gives the correct answers.. 120. - Sts are able to improve their pair-working to choose the best sentences KII, XI. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(121) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 5. ___ the bad condition of the house, the council demolished it. A. although B. in spite of C. because D. because of Expected answers: 1. A, 2. C, 3. B, 4. C, 5. D Exercise 2: (Game - Ring the golden bell) Rewrite these sentences using the given words 1. Because of the cold weather, we kept the fire burning all day  Because the weather was cold, we kept the fire burning all day 2. Although the weather was cold, we all wore shorts  In spite of the cold weather, we all wore shorts 3. Because he was ill, he had to cancel the appointment  Because of his illness, he had to cancel the appointment 4. In spite of the large crowds, there were enough seats for everyone  Although the crowds were large, there were enough seats for everyone 5. In spite of his illness, he managed to come to school  Although he was ill, he managed to come to school V. Free – Practice: Make sentences. - Ask Ss to do exercise 2 in groups and then compare their answers with another student. - T calls on some Ss to read aloud their answers. - T gives the correct answers.. - Sts are able to improve their team-working to rewrite the sentences KII, XI. - Ask Sts to make Work Improve sentences using individually speaking skill because, because of, in XI, CIII spite of, although. 1. Because the weather is cold, he wears warm clothes. " Because of the cold weather, he wears warm clothes. 2. In spite of his tiredness, he went to school  In spite of being tired, he went to school. Although he was tired, he went to school. V. Consolidation and Homework:. - Ask Sts to learn by - Listen to the Self - study heart all the teacher knowledge they’ve learnt and practice them again at home. - Ask Sts to prepare the next lesson IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences: 1. Table of description of competence level: Levels APPLICATION RECOGNITI LOWHighContent ON UNDERSTANDING APPLICATION APPLICATION. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 121. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(122) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Pronunciation Grammar. \Demonstrates how to use “Because of” and “In spite of”.. - Pronounce /eɪ/, /aɪ/ and /ɔɪ/, - Ss do extra exercise: Pick out the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the other words.. - Choose the best Rewrite the answer sentences using the give words. 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises: A. Recognition + Understanding: Which of the following words in each group has the underlined part pronounced differently from that of the others? 1. A. nation B. badminton C. radio D. information 2. A. routine B. violent C. decide D. provide 3. A. avoid B. doing C. enjoy D. loyal C. Low and High application: Complete the sentence with “although; in spite of; because or because of”. 1. Although it rained a lot, we enjoyed our vacation. 2. In spite of ____________ all our careful plans, a lot of things went wrong. 3. I went home early because ____________ I was feeling sick. 4. The flight may be cancelled because of ____________the thick fog. 5. Although ____________she was rich, she didn’t own a house. 6. She could not sleep because of ____________ the noise. Self-evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………….............. .................................................................................................................................................................... ----    ---Tổ trưởng kí duyệt 25/11/2016. Hứa Thị Hoài Thanh Class 10C…., WEEK 16 Preparation date: 04/12/2016 Teaching date: …./12/2016 Period: 46/61 UNIT 7: THE MASS MEDIA E. LANGUAGE FOCUS 2 Allocated time: 45 minutes I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - revise the present perfect and distinguish the present perfect and past simple 2. Skills: Reading and speaking 3. Attitude: - Actively take part in classroom activities, use present perfect to express what they have done. 4. Main points: Form, use, adverbs of the present perfect and past simple, since/ for/ ago 5. Competences: - General competences: self-study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized competences: Give the correct form of verbs, and use adverbs correctly II. Teaching preparation: 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk, handouts … 2. Preparation of students: Textbook, notebook, pen…. III. Activities of teaching and learning: Content I. Warm-up: Chatting When did you start learning at LHP high school? - How long have you learnt/ studied here?. Teacher’s activities T asks questions. Students’ Competences activities - Listen to the KI T and give the answer. Expected answer: I started learning here 4 months ago.. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 122. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(123) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School We have learnt here for 4 months/ since August 2016 Lead in: which tenses are used? Today we are going to revise the present perfect and distinguish with past simple II. Grammar: Activity 1: Review the present perfect 1. Examples We have just finished lesson 7 for 45 minutes We have not finished lesson 7 for 45 minutes. Have you finished lesson 7 for 45 minutes? 2. Form : S+have/ has + V(3) S+ have/ has + not +V(3) Have / has + S + V(3) ? Adv: for / since/ already/ yet/ never/ ever...... * Use: express an action happened in the past and still last in the present and future. 3. Distinguishing: Simple past: S+ Ved/ V2 For actions that happened and finished in the past With yesterday, then, ago, last night/week …, in 2001. IV. Practice: Exercise 1: Complete the letter, using the present perfect of the verbs in the box Expected answers 1. have been 2. has lived 3. have met 4. have done 5. have had 6. have taken 7. have watched Exercise 2: Complete the following sentences using for, since or ago Expected answers 1. since 2. ago 3. for 4. for 5. since 7. ago 8. ago 10. since. - T writes some - Take notes sentences on the board and underline the present perfect - T asks Ss to comment on the rules and meaning. Sts are able to understand the usage of “Because of” and “In spite of” PI, PII. - Ask Sts to give examples. - T elicits the regular - Do exercise or irregular of verbs Asks Ss to do exercise 1 in pairs and then compare their answers with another student. - T calls on some Ss to read aloud their answers. - T gives the correct answers.. - Sts are able to improve their pair-working to choose the best sentences KII, XI. 6. for 9. since. - Ask Ss to do exercise 2 in groups and then compare their answers with another student. - T calls on some Ss to read aloud their answers. - T gives the correct answers. V. Free – Practice: Express what has happened to you recently using some cues: do exercises, read a book V. Consolidation and Homework:. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. - Sts are able to improve their team-working to rewrite the sentences KII, XI. Work Improve individually speaking skill XI, CIII - Ask Sts to learn by - Listen to the Self - study heart all the teacher. 123. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(124) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School knowledge they’ve learnt and practice them again at home. - Ask Sts to prepare the next lesson IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences: 1. Table of description of competence level:. Levels. APPLICATION RECOGNITI LOWHighContent ON UNDERSTANDING APPLICATION APPLICATION Pronunciation Form, adverbs The similarity and difference Giving the correct Making sentences The present of the present between Simple Past and form of verbs perfect perfect Present Perfect 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises: A. Recognition + Understanding: Simple Past Present Perfect For actions that happened and finished in the For actions which started in the past and past continue up to now For actions that happened in the past and we For actions that happened in the past but we know exactly when don’t know the exact time With yesterday, then, ago, last night/week With for, since, ever, never, yet, already, so …, in 2001.. far, how long… C. Low and High application: Use simple Past or Present Perfect: 1. ……………….Helen ever ……………………. (try) sushi? 2. ………………… you ……………………….. (go) to the wedding last night? 3. I ……………….. never …………………………(be) to Paris. 4. This year I ………………….………… (travel) to Athens 3 times so far. 5. Paul and Judith …………………………………(be) married since 1998. 6. …………… you ………………………….(finish) your homework yet? 7. When ………………you …………………………(come) to Greece? 8. I……………………(come) in 2007. Key: 1 Has…tried, 2 Did…go, 3 have…been, 4 have travelled, 5 have been, 6 Have… finished, 7 did… come, 8 came Self-evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………….............. .................................................................................................................................................................... Class 10C…., WEEK 16 Preparation date: 04/12/2016 Teaching date: …./12/2016 Period: 46/61 UNIT 7: THE MASS MEDIA E. LANGUAGE FOCUS 2 Allocated time: 45 minutes I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - revise the present perfect and distinguish the present perfect and past simple 2. Skills: Reading and speaking 3. Attitude: - Actively take part in classroom activities, use present perfect to express what they have done. 4. Main points: Form, use, adverbs of the present perfect and past simple, since/ for/ ago 5. Competences: - General competences: self-study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized competences: Give the correct form of verbs, and use adverbs correctly II. Teaching preparation: 1. Preparation of teacher: Textbook, chalk, handouts … 2. Preparation of students: Textbook, notebook, pen…. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 124. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(125) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School III. Activities of teaching and learning: Content I. Warm-up: Chatting When did you start learning at LHP high school? - How long have you learnt/ studied here? Expected answer: I started learning here 4 months ago. We have learnt here for 4 months/ since August 2016 Lead in: which tenses are used? Today we are going to revise the present perfect and distinguish with past simple II. Grammar: Activity 1: Review the present perfect 1. Examples We have just finished lesson 7 for 45 minutes We have not finished lesson 7 for 45 minutes. Have you finished lesson 7 for 45 minutes? 2. Form : S+have/ has + V(3) S+ have/ has + not +V(3) Have / has + S + V(3) ? Adv: for / since/ already/ yet/ never/ ever...... * Use: express an action happened in the past and still last in the present and future. 3. Distinguishing: Simple past: S+ Ved/ V2 For actions that happened and finished in the past With yesterday, then, ago, last night/week …, in 2001. IV. Practice: Exercise 1: Complete the letter, using the present perfect of the verbs in the box Expected answers 1. have been 2. has lived 3. have met 4. have done 5. have had 6. have taken 7. have watched. Exercise 2: Complete the following sentences using for, since or ago Expected answers 1. since 2. ago 3. for 4. for 5. since 6. for 7. ago 8. ago 9. since 10. since V. Free – Practice: Express what has happened to you recently using some cues: do exercises, read a book V. Consolidation and Homework:. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Teacher’s activities T asks questions. Students’ Competences activities - Listen to the KI T and give the answer. - T writes some - Take notes sentences on the board and underline the present perfect - T asks Ss to comment on the rules and meaning. Sts are able to understand the usage of “Because of” and “In spite of” PI, PII. - Ask Sts to give examples. - T elicits the regular - Do exercise or irregular of verbs Asks Ss to do exercise 1 in pairs and then compare their answers with another student. - T calls on some Ss to read aloud their answers. - T gives the correct answers.. - Sts are able to improve their pair-working to choose the best sentences KII, XI. - Ask Ss to do exercise 2 in groups and then compare their answers with another student. - T calls on some Ss to read aloud their answers. - T gives the correct answers.. - Sts are able to improve their team-working to rewrite the sentences KII, XI. Work Improve individually speaking skill XI, CIII - Ask Sts to learn by - Listen to the Self - study heart all the teacher. 125. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(126) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School knowledge they’ve learnt and practice them again at home. - Ask Sts to prepare the next lesson IV. Questions of evaluating students’ competences: 1. Table of description of competence level:. Levels. APPLICATION RECOGNITI LOWHighContent ON UNDERSTANDING APPLICATION APPLICATION Pronunciation Form, adverbs The similarity and difference Giving the correct Making sentences The present of the present between Simple Past and form of verbs perfect perfect Present Perfect 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises: A. Recognition + Understanding: Simple Past Present Perfect For actions that happened and finished in the For actions which started in the past and past continue up to now For actions that happened in the past and we For actions that happened in the past but we know exactly when don’t know the exact time With yesterday, then, ago, last night/week With for, since, ever, never, yet, already, so …, in 2001.. far, how long… C. Low and High application: Use simple Past or Present Perfect: 9. ……………….Helen ever ……………………. (try) sushi? 10.………………… you ……………………….. (go) to the wedding last night? 11.I ……………….. never …………………………(be) to Paris. 12. This year I ………………….………… (travel) to Athens 3 times so far. 13. Paul and Judith …………………………………(be) married since 1998. 14. …………… you ………………………….(finish) your homework yet? 15. When ………………you …………………………(come) to Greece? 16. I……………………(come) in 2007. Key: 1 Has…tried, 2 Did…go, 3 have…been, 4 have travelled, 5 have been, 6 Have… finished, 7 did… come, 8 came Self-evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………….............. ..................................................................................................................................................................... Week 16, Period 47, Class: 10C Date of preparation: 04/12/2016 Date of teaching: /12/2016 UNIT 8: THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE READING. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 126. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(127) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, sts are able to read the passage about country life. - Read and guess the meaning of words/ phrases in the context by matching them with definitions - improve reading comprehension skill by answering the questions, matching and Table Completion Exercises. 2 - Skills: + Guessing meaning in context + Reading comprehension + Scanning for specific information 3. Attitude: It aims to educate students to understand more about what they should do to better their lives and the changes of the village 4. Main points: Vocabulary about the story of the village, practising of reading skills to understand the content of the text. 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: knowing the way how to do tasks and improving skills  Guessing meaning in context  Passage comprehension  Scanning for specific information II. Teaching preparation 1. Method: Integrated, mainly communicative. 2. Techniques: individually, pair work and group work. 3. Teaching aids: projector, blackboard, chalks, handouts and textbook. III. Activities of teaching and learning Content. Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. 1. Stabilization: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance. 2. Check-up: 15 minute- Test ( see handout below). T greets and distributes handouts. Do the test in 15’. - T asks Ss to work in groups of three or four and rearrange the jumbled words T asks qs - T shows some pictures - Sts distinguish these pictures.. work in groups of three or four and rearrange the jumbled words answer qs about village. New lesson: WARM – UP: Jumbled word : VILLAGE Question: What do you know about your village? PRE - READING Activity 1: Picture description. Compare the village in the past and now. - T has Ss work in pairs and discuss the questions in the book. -T calls on some pairs. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 127. guess the meaning of the words in the context.. Competenc es Previous knowledge of unit 6 and 7 K1 Sts get to know about the topic Village. Being able to see the changes. X1 Answering questions. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(128) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Expected answers: 1. The farmers are harvesting the crop. 2. They are working hard. 3. It’s good crop/ bumper crop. 4. Good farming methods, good varities, modern technology used, people work hard. Activity 2: Presenting vocabulary Teaching vocabulary + straw (n) + mud (n) -> muddy (adj) = wet, soft soil + technical high school (n) + farming method (n) + brick house : house made of brick + thanks to (exp) + bumper crop (n) + cash crop (n) Checking vocabulary: Task 1: Match the words in A with their definitions in B Expected answers: 1. b 2. d 3. a 4. e 5. c III. WHILE - READING TASK 2: TABLE COMPLETION. Expected answers: Areas of change houses Radio and TV Farming methods crops travel. Before. Now. Made of straw and mud Few families old. Made of bricks. poor. Good / bumper. no. By motobike. Many New. TASK 3: ANSWERING QUESTIONS Expected answers: 1. It was poor and simple. 2. Because they hoped that with an education of science and technology, their children could find a way of bettering their lives. 3. They introduced new farming methods which resulted in bumper crops. They also helped to grow cash crops for export. 4. He said their lives had changed a lot thanks to the knowledge their children brought home from technical high schools or colleges. 5. He told his grandchildren, “Study harder so that you can even do more for the village than your. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. to read their answer aloud - T gives feedback and corrects answers. TASK1: MATCHING VOCABULARY: - T asks Ss to work in pair ,read the passage and match the given words which all appear in A with their definitions in B explain their -T encourages Ss to answers in front of -T has ss compare their class. answers with a peer. - T calls on some ss to -T gives feedback and correct answers.. K1 Being able to recognize vocabulary (meaning and pronunciati on). TASK 2: TABLE COMPLETION - T lets ss to study the table carefully before doing the task. - T goes around the class and help them when necessary. - T tells Ss to discuss the answers with a friend. - T checks the answers in front of class. - T gives the correct answers.. Ss are able to improve their teamworking skill; complete the table.. TASK3: ANSWERING QUESTIONS - T gets Ss to work in pairs : Read the passage again and answer the questions in task 3. - T tells Ss to underline the information that suport the answers. - T calls on some Ss to practise loudly. - T gives feedback and gives correct answers.. 128. work in group Sts scan the passage to get specific information to complete the table. to study the table carefully before doing the task.. work in pairs : Read the passage again and answer the questions in task 3.. underline the information that suport the answers.. - Ss are able to improve their pairworking skill; get the main ideas and apply the structures they’ve learnt to answer the questions.. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(129) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School parents did. IV. POST – READING: discuss the questions: “ How can people with an education help make the life their community better?” Expected answers: + introduce new farming methods. + grow cash crops for export. + help local people apply modern technology in farming.. - T asks Ss to work in work in groups and Ss are able groups and discuss the discuss the to improve questions: questions: their team- T goes around the working class and helps them skill; when necessary. discuss the - T gives feeedback question. V. CONSOLIDATION - Summarize the main points. VI. HOMEWORK - Learn the new words by heart. - Prepare next part: Unit 8: Speaking.. IV. DESCRIPTION ON THE COMPETENCES Levels Topic READING. RECOGNITION Lexical items - Word form/ vocabulary… - Matching the words with their definitions. APPLICATION LOWAPPLICATION -Sts are able to answer the questions. UNDERSTANDING - Sts are able to complete the table about areas of changes in the village. V. EVALUATING QUESTIONS: A. Recognition: Choose the correct answer to each of the following questions. 1. They tried to find a way of bettering their lives. A. moving B. changing C. achieving 2. Last year we had a bumper crop of strawberries. A. large crop B. poor crop C. early crop 3. The recent heavy rains have helped to ease the water _________. A. supply B. poverty C. plenty 4. He came in tired and hungry and badly _________need of a bath. A. for B. to C. on B. Understanding: What are areas of changes in the village in the passage? Answer: houses, radio and TV, farming methods, crops, travel C. Low and High application: Talk about the changes in your village. HighAPPLICATION Ss are able to discuss the questionabout. D. improving D. record crop D. shortage D. in. Matrix of the 15 minute test MULTIPLE CHOICE 0.5 *12= 6. Part/section/ Q.no. Test items. Question levels Re. Phonetics 1. Lexis 2. Grammar. + Sound: /ə:/ and /ə / , /ei/ ,/ ai/,/ ɔi / + stress. App. 3x X. + Vocabulary of unit 6,7. 2x. + tense: present perfect, present progressive. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Un. 129. x. X. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(130) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School + Be going to + Preposition + word-form + because of WRITTEN FORM ( 4) 1.0*4= 4. Writing. x x x x. + Transformation - Present perfect passive - Because of - Who. Total mark 16 câu = 10 điểm Percentage %. 5. 6. 2x x x 5. 30%. 40%. 30%. 15 MINUTE- TEST Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the rest 1. A. hear B. river C. early D. term 2. A. make B. daily C. paper D. family 3. A. toy B. going C. noise C. choice Choose a word in each line that has different stress pattern. 4.A. formation B. industry C. computer D. pagoda Choose the best answer among A, B, C, or D that best fits the blank or that best explains the underlined part in each sentence 5. A________is a film made by photographing a series of changing drawings. A. Cartoon B. Drama C. Comedy D. Documentary 6. We are going on a __________to Vung Tau next week. A. two day trip B. two-days trip C. two-day trip D. twoday trip 7. The Browns _____ to the cinema this evening. A. are going B. will go C. go D. went 8. Our class _______a picnic at Thay Pagoda this Sunday. A. am having B. will has C. is going to have D. go to have 9. One disadvantage of TV is that it interferes _____________family life. A. with B. to C. for D. of 10. How long have you known them? - ___________________ A. since five years B. Ever since five years C. five years D. for five years 11. We receive information from radio through ears. A. orally B. visually C. aurally D. usually Choose the underlined part that needs correcting. 12.My family has lived in the same house in 2002. A B C D Rewrite each sentence, beginning as shown, so that the meaning stays the same. 4ms 1. The football match had to be called off because of the bad weather.  Because ……………………………………………………………………….. 2. They have just finished their work.  Their work ……………………………………………………………………….. 3. Because of his illness, he had to cancel the appointment.  Because ……………………………………………………………………….. 4. The girl is wearning a brown coat. She is a good student.  The girl ………………………………………………………………………..  Suggested answers: 1. Because the weather was bad, the football match had to be called off. 2. Their work has jus been finished. 3. Because he was ill, he had to cancel the appointment. 4. The girl who is wearning a brown coat is a good student.. Week 16, Period 48. --------------------------------    ---------------------------------------Date of preparation: 04 /12/2016 Date of teaching: /12 /2016 UNIT 8: THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 130. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(131) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School SPEAKING I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: Sts will be able to talk about plans to improve life of a village and their possible results. 2 - Skills: develop speaking skill through working in pairs and in groups. 3. Attitude: It aims to educate students to understand more about what they should do to better their lives and the changes of the village, actively take part in classroom activities. 4. Main points: Vocabulary about the plans to improve the life in the village and possible results, 1 st type conditional sentence 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: knowing the way how to do tasks and improving speaking skills II. Teaching preparation 1. Method: Integrated, mainly communicative. 2. Techniques: individually, pair work and group work. 3. Teaching aids: projector, blackboard, chalks, handouts and textbook. III. Activities of teaching and learning 1. Stabilization: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance. 2. Check-up: Answer the questions, write newwords. 1. What was life like in the author’s village many years ago? 2. Why did the villagers want to send their children to school and college in spite of their shortage? 3.New lesson: Content Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Competences I. WARM – UP Brainstorming - T asks Ss to make a make a list of the - Sts are able Make a list of the ideas that can be carried out to list of the ideas that ideas that can be to list of the improve the village life. can be carried out to carried out to ideas that can Expected answers improve the village improve the village be carried out life. life. to improve the Roads - Sts work in group village life. and brainstorm crops - T encourages ss to have ideas of their medical own. centre Improvement - T gives feedback Of the village houses bridges. schools. II. PRE - SPEAKING TASK1: Matching Task 1: “The village of Ha Xuyen are discussing plans to improve life in the village “Match the plans with possible results. Expected answers: 1.B 2.G 3.D 4.E 5.F 6.C Teaching Vocabulary: + raise (v) + resurface (v) = renew, put new surface on + canal (n) = man made waterway for irrigation + muddy (adj) : full of mud give explanation following the model A: Why should we widen the roads? B: We should we widen them so that cars and lorries can get to the village III. PRACTICE: TASK 2: Practice reading. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. - Ask Ss to open their books and look at the situation in - Explain some new words and have sts repeat. do the task in pairs. Sts are able to get to know the meaning of some new words and pronounce them correctly. - Have Ss do the task in pairs . Tell Ss to. Talk about the plans and possible results in the village - Practise it in front of class - Ask Ss to work in. 131. Ss are able to talk about the plans and possible results in the village. -. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(132) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School If + S + V (present) , S+ will / can + V (bareinfinitive) Ex: If the roads are widened , cars and lorries can get to our village. - Provide some useful language: * Giving agreement : + I think that we should....... + That’s a good ideas. + I think so. We should + I completedly agree with you.. groups of three: Read and practise the conversation. - Call on some groups to practise the conversation in front of class. - T elicits Conditional sentences type 1:. - Sts are able to improve their teamworking skill, role play the conversation.. -T elicits Conditional sentences type 1 and copy down. T gives some words/ phrases to express agreement. IV. PRODUCTION: Conversation - T asks sts to work completion in group A: I/ think / we / build / football ground - T goes round and B: I / completely / agree with you. If / it / help them if build / young people/play sports/ improve/ neccessary health. C: A football ground / a place / where / people meet / exchane ideas. A: What about/ medical centre? I / think / necessary / build / it. B: That’s a good idea. If / it / built / people’s health / looked after/ better. C: Yes, and If / we / sick. We / not / have / go / district / provincial hospital/ for treatment. VII. CONSOLIDATION T asks sts to - Summarize the main points. summarize the plans, VIII. HOMEWORK results, conditional - Learn the conversation by heart. sentences - Prepare next part: Unit 8: Listening IV. DESCRIPTION ON THE COMPETENCES Levels Topic Speaking. work in groups of three: Read and practise the conversation. RECOGNITION UNDERSTANDING - Recognize the Task 1: Understand plans and their about plans and their possible results possible results.. -. Sts complete and role play the converstion. Conversation completion. summarize the plans, results, conditional sentences. APPLICATION LOW- APPLICATION High- APPLICATION Task 2: practise the conversation.. Task 3: Conversation completion. V. EVALUATING QUESTIONS: a) Questions for recognition: Task 1 b) Questions for understanding: Task 2 Task 1: Choose the best answer c) Questions for application: Task 3: After you speak: Discussion Tổ trưởng kí duyệt week 16 05/12/2016. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 132. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(133) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Hứa Thị Hoài Thanh -. Week 17, Period 49. -------------------------------    ---------------------------------------Date of preparation: 05 /12/2016 Date of teaching: /12/2016 UNIT 8: THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE LISTENING. I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to compare the past and the present of a town. - improve their listening skill through True or False and gap filling exercises. 2. Skill: extensive listening skills 3. Attitude: It aims to help sts know more about the changes in a hometown, actively take part in classroom activities 4. Main points: Vocabulary about the text, listening skills 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: knowing the way how to do tasks and improving listening skills II. Teaching preparation 1. Method: Integrated, mainly communicative. 2. Techniques: individually, pair work and group work. 3. Teaching aids: projector, blackboard, chalks, handouts and textbook. III. Activities of teaching and learning 1. Stabilization : Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance. 2. Check-up : Role play the conversation. 3. New lesson: Content I. WARM – UP talk about things they did in the past, using the structure: “USED TO”. Teacher’s activities - T asks Ss to work in groups and talk about things they did in the past, using the structure: “USED TO” - T calls on some groups to talk in front of the class.. II. PRE - LISTENING Activity 1: Pictures description. - T asks Ss to look at two pictures in the text Look at two pictures in the text book and book and talk about differences talk about the differences between them in the between them in the the past and nowadays. past and nowadays. In the past Nowadays -T calls on some Ss to - No cars, hotels - There is a hotel in share their findings in the town. front of class. - small houses - Tall buidings T gives the - buffalos on the - No cows, buffalos comments and write roads and cows - the roads are them on the board grazing so the roads widen, bigger, are dirty clearner - the roads are narrow. - a lot of trees - no trees. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 133. Students’ activities work in groups and talk about things they did in the past, using the structure: “USED TO” -Look at two pictures in the text book and talk about the differences between them in the past and nowadays.. Competences Ss are able to compare some things in the past and now. to look at two Ss are able to pictures in the text talk about the book and talk about differences the differences between two between them in pictures. the past and nowadays K1, X1. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(134) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Activity 2: Teaching vocabulary + coast + tourist resort + atmostphere - T asks sts to work in pair - T ask Ss to read all statements carefully and understand them. - Play the tape several times if necessary. - Have Ss compare their answers with a friend and correct the false ones. - Call on some ss to read their answers aloud. - Feedback and give correct answers. - T asks sts to work in pair - Tell Ss to read a part of the talk carefully and have a guess of the missing words. - Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and fill the gaps with the words they hear. - Play the tape more than once if necessary - Call on some Ss to read their answers. - Feedback and give correct answers.. read all statements carefully and understand them.. IV. POST - LISTENING - Have Ss work in Work in groups: Discuss about the changes in group and talk about your own hometown or home village. the changes in your own hometown or Discuss about the changes in your own home village hometown or home village. - Call on some Ss to - Useful structures: present their ideas’ + Used to groups in front of + There is/ are used to class. + there didn’t use to Listen their + have /has done /been done.. comments and correct mistakes V. CONSOLIDATION - Summarize the main points. VI. HOMEWORK - Revise the lesson. - Prepare next part: Unit 8: Writing. work in group and talk about the changes in your own hometown or home village. III. WHILE - LISTENING TASK1: True Or False Expected answers: 1. F (It ‘s on the south coast of England) 2. F ( It used to be a small quite town) 3. T 4. F ( A lot of trees have been cut down for wider streets) 5. F ( Some people don’t like the changes , they miss the quiet and peaceful life of the town). TASK2: Gap-filling Expected answers: 1. houses 2. hotel 4. cut 5. car 7. department 8. expensive. 3. widened 6. shop. IV. Description 4 levels of awareness Levels RECOGNITION UNDERSTANDING. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Ss are able to get information, decide the statements T/ F.. Ss are able to improve their pair-working read a part of the skill; get the talk carefully and main ideas and have a guess of the fill in the missing words. blanks. Sts are able to improve their group-working skill; develop speaking skill. APPLICATION. 134. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(135) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Topic LISTENING. LOWAPPLICATION - Fill in the missing words. HighAPPLICATION Dicuss the changes in the hometown. Recognize and tick Listen and understand the the information statements T/ F. they’ve listened to in the passage. V.Questions/ Evaluating exercises a) Questions for Recognition + Understanding Vocabulary about the text b) Questions for application: gap- fill destroyed buildings trees park people peaceful replaced expensive south widened Popffero used to be a small quiet town on the ………1………coast of England. But it has become a crowded and busy tourist resort now. They’ve completely …………2……….its old atmosphere. The small old houses have been pulled down, and tall ………3……….have been put there instead. They’ve also built a big hotel in the middle of the town. The narrow streets have been ………4………and resurfaced, so the big ………5…….on the two sides of the streets have been cut down. The large area of the grass land in the suburbs of the town has been turned into an ugly car………6……… . Even the old corner shop isn’t there any more. It has been …………7……..by a big department store. And there is an …………8……….restaurant where there used to be an old tea shop. Many …………9………in Popffero are happy with the changes as there are more jobs for them. But some people don’t like the changes, they miss the quiet and ………10……….life of the old town. Tapesript: U8-10 Popffero used to be a small quiet town on the south coast of England. But it has become a crowded and busy tourist resort now. They’ve completely destroyed its old atmosphere. The small old houses have been pulled down, and tall buildings have been put there instead. They’ve also built a big hotel in the middle of the town. The narrow streets have been widened and resurfaced, so the big trees on the two sides of the streets have been cut down. The large area of the grass land in the suburbs of the town has been turned into an ugly car park. Even the old corner shop isn’t there any more. It has been replaced by a big department store. And there is an expensive restaurant where there used to be an old tea shop. Many people in Popffero are happy with the changes as there are more jobs for them. But some people don’t like the changes; they miss the quiet and peaceful life of the old town. --------------------------------    ----------------------------------------. Week 17, Period 50. Date of preparation: 11 /12/2016 Date of teaching: /12/2016 UNIT 8: THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE WRITING 1. Knowledge:: By the end of the lesson, write a letter giving directions to a certain place. - practise their writing skill. 2. Skill: extensive listening skills 3. Attitude: It aims to help sts know more giving directions 4. Main points: Vocabulary about giving directions and writing directions 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: knowing the way how to do tasks and improving writing skills. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 135. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(136) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School II. Teaching preparation 1. Method: Integrated, mainly communicative. 2. Techniques: individually, pair work and group work. 3. Teaching aids: projector, blackboard, chalks, handouts and textbook. III. Activities of teaching and learning 1. Stabilization: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance. 2. Check-up : Role play the conversation. 3. New lesson:. Content I. WARM – UP Asking the questions Questions: 1. Where is your house? 2. Could you tell me the way to your house? II. PRESENTATION TASK 1: Reading the letter * Useful expressions about directions: * Asking for directions: + Could you tell me the way to ................? + Can you show me how to get to ............? * Answering for directions: + turn left/ right + come out of + keeping walking / riding / driving + go over / pass / walk past / go through + take the first / second / third turning. + turning on the left / right + It’s opposite / near / next to / in front of. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Competences - T asks sts some - Sts answer the Sts are able to questions. questions answer the - T leads to new lesson questions Read the -T introduces the again and situation and asks Ss to directions. work in pairs. Find Ann’s house on the map by reading letter. Note: Ss can draw the directions while discussing. - Asks them to read the letter again and give directions. -Provides some useful expressions about directions:. letter give. TASK 2: Asking and answering about directions on the map. - T asks Ss to work in pairs. Ask and answer about directions on the map in order to find the bookshop, sourvenir shop. - T go around and help them. - T calls some pairs to practise in pairs aloud. - T listens and corrects errors. III. PRACTICE TASK 3: Writing a letter giving directions Suggested writing: Dear Jim, I’m very happy to hear that you will come here for the summer holliday. I’m writing to tell you how to get to my house from the Roston R. Staton. Now, when you come out of the station, turn right. Keep walking for about 5 mins, you will see a small bridge ahead. Go over the bridge, Go along the street past the medical centre and the car park, then take the second turning on the left. Walk past the souvenir shop and you will see my house. It’s on the right, next to the shoe shop. You can’t miss it, I enclose the map so that you can follow my directions easily. Looking forward to seeing you soon. Loves, IV. PRODUCTION - Have Ss compare their writing with a peer. - Peer correction. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. K1 Ss are able to know some useful expressions about directions... K1, X1,Ss are able to recognize some places on the map. T ask Ss to write the letter in group - T goes around the class to provide help them when necessary.. 136. Write the letter. K2 P2 Ss are able to improve their team-working skill; practice writing letter. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(137) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School - Pick up some writing and correct in front of class. - Feedback and give correct answers.. - Summarize the main points. X1 - Rewrite the letter Ss are able to in the notebook. develop peer - Prepare next part: correction Unit 8: Language focus. V. CONSOLIDATION - Summarize the main points. VI. HOMEWORK - Rewrite the letter in the notebook. - Prepare next part: Unit 8: Language focus IV. Detailed description table and questions: 1. Description 4 levels of awareness Levels Topic WRITING. RECOGNITION UNDERSTANDING Remember the Understand the content of way of writing a writing about the informal letter giving letter directions V.Questions/ Evaluating exercises a) Questions for Recognition + Understanding Vocabulary, phrases about giving directions b) Questions for application: Complete the letter about giving directions. APPLICATION LOWAPPLICATION Write an informal letter: giving directions. Period 17, Period 51. HighAPPLICATION Report the writing. Date of preparation: Date of teaching:. 12 /12/2016 /12/2016. UNIT 8: THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE LANGUAGE FOCUS 1 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to distinguish and pronounce the sounds /au/ and /ou/ clearly and correctly. - rewrite the sentence in reported speech. 2. Skill: Reading and speaking 3. Attitude: It aims to help sts know 2 dipthongs, and reported speech 4. Main points: the sounds /au/ and /ou/, the sentence in reported speech. 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: knowing the way how to do tasks and improving language knowledge II. Teaching preparation 1. Method: Integrated, mainly communicative. 2. Techniques: individually, pair work and group work. 3. Teaching aids: projector, blackboard, chalks, handouts and textbook. III. Activities of teaching and learning 1. Stabilization: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance. 2. Check-up : Role play the conversation. 3. New lesson: Content I. WARM – UP Asking the questions * What is under our eyes? * What is under our nose? Suggested answers: * It’s a nose. * It’s a mouth.. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Teacher’s activities - T asks sts to answer the questions - T underlines the syllabics - T ask Ss to guess “ which syllables are we going to study?” - T leads to new lesson.. 137. Students’ activities Answer questions. Competences Ss are able to recognize three sounds through the underlined words. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(138) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School II. PRONUNCIATION 1. Presentation:. /au/ and /ou/. Note : Minimal pairs /au/ Cow House Town Mouse Couch How 2. Practice:. /ou/ Coat Bowl Phone Note Bone Close. 3. Production: Choose the different pronunciation 1. A. drove B. love C. woke D. hole 2. A. snow B. low C. show D. cow 3. A. allow B. loud C. owl D. flow 4. A. foul B. group C. shout D. mouse Suggested answers: 1.B 2.D 3.D 4.B III. GRAMMAR: * REPORTED SPEECH WITH STATEMENTS: 1. Examples. a. I say, “ You have to work harder, Nam” -> I tell Nam that he has to work harder. b. I said, “ You have to work harder, Nam” -> I told Nam that he had to work harder 2. Eliciting: Direct -> indirect speech Notes: * say , tell in the present : no change tense of verb in reported clause. * say, tell in the past : + Change pronouns: S, O and possessive adj.. - Helps Ss to Distinguish two distinguish two sounds. sounds. listen and repeat -Ask them to listen and several times. repeat several times. - Open their textbooks and practise the sentences. - Call on some Ss to pronounce two sounds. - Peer correction. - T give a handout with exercises - T asks st to read and recognize the different sound. am / is / are Was / were V / V_s/es V_ed / V2 Have / has Don’t / doesn’t Will / can / must. Ss are able to practice the sounds correctly. - T give some examples - T asks sts to work in pair and rewrite the sentences. 1. Examples. . 2. presentation. + Change tenses of verb by moving “one tense back” DIRECT. read and recognize the different sound. Ss are able to recognize the sounds correctly. Answer t’s questions and take notes the rules. Ss are able to know the rule of verbs in reported clause .. REPORTED SPEECH was / were Had been V_ed / V2 Had V_ed / V3 Had Didn’t Would / could / had to. + Change adv of time and place. DIRECT REPORTED SPEECH. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 138. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(139) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Here This These Now Today Ago Tonight Tomorrow Yesterday Last night. There That Those Then That day Before That night The next / following day The day before The night before. In pairs, do exercises 3. Practice: Ask Ss to do exercise 1,2 - Ask Ss to work in group , do exercise 1,2 in their text book. - Call on some ss to write the sentences on the board.. - Feedback and give correct answers.. Note: S + say to + O + S + V S + tell + O + S + V S + talk to sb about sth 3. Practice: Ask Ss to do exercise 1,2 Exercise1 : Report these statements, using the verbs suggested Suggested answers: 1. An old farmer said their lives had changed a lot thanks to the knowledge their children had brought home. 2. She said she was going to Ho Chi Minh City soon. 3. I thought the film would be interesting. 5.Rick told me that Ann had written Jim a letter. 7.She said she thought it was a crazy idea and that it wouldn’t work. 8.He announced that breakfast was served between 7:00 and 9:00. Exercise2: complete the sentences, using the correct form of say, tell or talk 1. told 2. said 3. said 4. told 5. talked IV. CONSOLIDATION - Summarize the main points. V. HOMEWORK - Redo all the exercses in the notebook. - Prepare next part: Test Yourself C IV. Detailed description table and questions: 1. Description 4 levels of awareness Levels. Ss are able to improve their pair-working skill; rewrite the sentences correctly.. - Summarize the main points. - Redo all the exercses in the notebook. - Prepare next part: Conditional sentences. Topic LANGUAGE FOCUS. RECOGNITION UNDERSTANDING - remember the - Know the rule clearly rule of the - know how to use the sounds / au/ and statement in reported speech /ou/ - recognize the sentences in reported speech 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises a) Questions for Recognition + Understanding Exercise 2: use say, tell, talk about b) Questions for application: Exercise 1: Report these statements. APPLICATION LOWAPPLICATION - Choose the word that has different pronunciation - put the verb in blanks. HighAPPLICATION Rewrite the sentences. Tổ trưởng kí duyệt week 17. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 139. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(140) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 12/12/2016. Hứa Thị Hoài Thanh Period 18, Period 52. Date of preparation: Date of teaching:. 12 /12/2016 /12/2016. UNIT 8: THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE LANGUAGE FOCUS 2 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to revise conditional sentence type 1 2. Skill: extensive listening skills 3. Attitude: It aims to help sts know about conditional sentecence 4. Main points: Vocabulary about giving directions and writing directions 5. Competences: - General Competences: self study, cooperation, communication, interaction, problem-solving… - Specialized Competences: knowing the way how to do tasks and improving writing skills II. Teaching preparation 1. Method: Integrated, mainly communicative. 2. Techniques: individually, pair work and group work. 3. Teaching aids: projector, blackboard, chalks, handouts and textbook. III. Activities of teaching and learning 1. Stabilization: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance. 2. Check-up : Role play the conversation. 3. New lesson:. Content Warm-up: Talk about some plans to improve the life in the village and give some possible results Example: If we build a new school, children will have better learning conditions. T leads into the new lesson: * CONDITIONAL SENTENCES: 1. Examples: - Ask Ss: What will you do if you have a lot of money?  If I have a lot of money, I will buy a new bicycle. 2. Form and use - Elicit Conditional sentences type 1: If S + V(present) + S+ will/ can + V Note: Unless= If......not 3. Distinguish : When - clause & If - clause * When - clause : refers to “ all time” , not just the present or future . They express a situation that is always true. It means whenever Ex: When winner comes, It’ll be very cold.. Teacher’s activities . WARM – UP T asks sts to talk about some plans to improve the life in the village and give some possible results. Exercise 3: Look at what Ha Anh hopes will happen in the future. Make sentences, using If…………………, will Suggested answers: 1. If I don’t go out so much, I’ll do more homework. 2. If I do more homwork, I’ll pass my exam. 3. If I pass my exam, I’ll go to medical college. 4. If I go to medical college, I’ll study medicine.. Practice : Ask Ss to do exercise 3,4 - Ask Ss to do exercise 3, 4 in their text book - Call on some ss to read their completed sentences. - Feedback and give correct answers.. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 140. Students’ activities Competences talk about some plans to improve the life in the village and give some possible K1 results Sts are able to know the form of conditional sentence.. K2, X1 Ss are able to improve their pair-working skill; complete the sentences correctly. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(141) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 5. If I study medicine, I’ll become a doctor. 6. If I become a doctor, I’ll be able to cure diseases and help sick people. Exercise 4: Put when or if into each gap 1. If 2. When 3. if 4. If 5. When Give the correct verb forms. 6. He will have time to get ready if he (get) _gets________up early. 7. If you (go) ____go_____away, please (write) _write________to me. 8. Mary will come tomorrow. If you (be) _are________free, ____will_____you (pick) _pick__her up? 9. If she (go) _goes________ down town tomorrow, she (buy) will buy__a new hat. 10. He’ll be late for the bus if he (not start) _does not start____at once. IV. CONSOLIDATION - Summarize the main points. V. HOMEWORK - Redo all the exercses in the notebook. - Prepare next part: Test Yourself C -. - Summarize the main points. - Redo all the exercses in the notebook. - Prepare next part: Test Yourself C. IV. Detailed description table and questions: 1. Description 4 levels of awareness Levels. APPLICATION LOWAPPLICATION - put the verb in blanks. HighRECOGNITION UNDERSTANDING APPLICATION recognize the - Understand conditional Rewrite the sentences in sentence type 1 sentences conditional sentence type 1. 3. Questions/ Evaluating exercises a) Questions for Recognition + Understanding Exercise : Give the correct form of verbs 1. If she doesn’t eat all that, she (not be) won’t___ill. 2. We’ll have to go without John if he (not/arrive) _does not arrive___soon. 3. They (not/refund) __won’t refund___you money if you haven’t kept your receipt. 4. If she (miss) __misses______the bus this afternoon, she’ll get a taxi instead. 5. If I make some coffee, ___will______you (cut) __cut_______the cake? 6. If you (not/do) ___don’t___________your homework, I (not/let) ___won’t let___you watch TV. 7. If you’re scared of spiders, ___don’t____________(not/go) into the garden. 8. If I (have) have___time tonight, I (finish) will finish__the novel I’m reading. 9. Get me a glass of lemonade if you (go) _go________to the kitchen. 10. If you (finish) ____finish___with the computer, I’ll put it away. b) Questions for application: Make conditional sentences to express something will happen in the future. Topic LANGUAGE FOCUS. Week 18, Period 53. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Date of preparation:. 141. 18 /12/2016. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(142) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Date of teaching: REVISION FOR THE FIRST TERM EXAMINATION. /12/2016. I. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will - Review main language knowledge: vocabulary, pronunciation, reading, listening skills and grammar points - review some tenses they learnt and present perfect passive. - review some grammartical points: used to, wh- questions, gerund, to inf, relative pronouns, which as a connector; because of & in spite of 2. Skills: Reading, speaking, listening and writing skill 3. Attitudes: Actively take part in classroom activities, try to find out answers 4. Orientation formation and capacity development - General capacity : self-study, use this point of language to communicate correctly - Specialized capacity : do exercises correctly II. Teaching preparation 1. Method: Integrated, mainly communicative. 2. Techniques: individually, pair work and group work. 3. Teaching aids: projector, blackboard, chalks, handouts and textbook III. Activities of teaching and learning 1. Stabilization: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance. 2. Check-up : Role play the conversation. 3. New lesson: Content - Pronunciation + stress - Vocabulary - Grammar - Reading - Writing - Listening. Teacher’s activities T asks sts to give some examples about words containing sounds Pronunciation: unit 3 /e/ : /æ/ , Unit 5: /u/, /u:/ unit 7: /ei/, /ai/, /ɔi/ T distributes handouts and asks sts to review language knowledge and do exercises. IV . Detailed description table and questions: 1. Description 4 levels of awareness Levels Topic Reading. Speaking. Listening. Writing Language focus. RECOGNITION Recognize some vocabularies about topics learnt Definition/ synonyms/ expressions…. Know how to ask and answer about the uses of modern invention. UNDERSTANDING Understand the topics about modern technology/ people’s background and find the correct answer. Listen and write down the correct information(fill in the gaps) Build up correct sentences from given words - Present perfect tense - Which as a connector. Listen and decide on T/F statements basing on synonyms, antonyms. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. Choose the best responses. Students’ activities. Competences Sts are able to remember all gammartical points. review language knowledge and do exercises. Ss are able to improve their teamworking skill;. APPLICATION LOWHighAPPLICATION APPLICATION Choose the best Give the correct options for cloze-text answers for inference question Use common expressions to communicate properly Answer inference questions. Rewrite sentences using same meaning structures The + adjective Used to + Vinfinitive, be used for + V-ing -. 142. Rewrite sentences: -present perfect passive tense -Who/ which /that Which as a connector. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(143) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School -Wh-questions for the underlined words: 2. Questions/ Evaluating exercises a) Questions for Recognition: - Choose the word that has the underlined letter(s) pronounced differently from the others - Choose the best option that best completes each sentence: - Reading comprehension: - Close text: b) Questions for understanding: - Choose the word that has stress pattern different from that of the other words. - Reading comprehension: - Close text: c) Questions for application: - Rewrite the following sentences: ĐỀ CƯƠNG ÔN THI HỌC KÌ I TIẾNG ANH 10 ( 2016- 2017) I. Phonetics Pronunciation: unit 3 /e/ : /æ/ , Unit 5: /u/, /u:/ unit 7: /ei/, /ai/, /ɔi/ Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the rest. 1. a. height b. life c. eighty d. sky 2. a. they b. radio c. play d. buy 3. a. enjoy b. boy c. going d. voice 4. a. mail b. fair c. nature d. radio 5. a loose b. choose c.book d.. loot 6. a. singer b. camera c. offer d. term 7. a. brilliant b. tragic c. award d. mature 8. a. death b. sea c . receive d. teacher 9. a. family b. sky c. history d. cloudy 10. a. took b. soon c. pool d. mood Stress: 1. a. repair b. thirty c. fellow d. quarter 2. a. family b. tobacco c. buffalo d. several 3. surname b. people c. provide d. narrow 4. a. country b. cousin c. borrow d. polite 5. a. secondary b. receive c. repeat d. award 6 a. person b. latter c. order d. decide 7.a. afternoon b. banana c. umbrella d. tomorrow 8.a. channel b. cartoon c. comedy d. common II. Grammar: 1. The past simple ( S+ v2/ ved) advs: ago, yesterday , in past times, last week…. 2. The past perfect : S+ had+ V-ed3/ (use after, before as hints to find the mistakes) 3. The present perfect: S+ has / have + V-ed/3 : adverbs: since, for, just, already, yet…. 4. Wh- questions: ( who: person, what: things, where: place, when: time, why: reason, how old: age / often: frequency, how many: quantity): 5. S+ Used to + infinitive: -> S+ did not use to + V -> Did + S+ Use to + V? 6. “Which” as a connector: 7.The present perfect passive: S+ has / have + been + V-ed/3 8.Relative pronouns: N(person) who + V, N(thing) which, That= who, which Ex: A clock is an instrument_______tells you the time.( who, whom, which) 9. Although / in spite of (distinguish the meaning) 10. Conditional sentence type 1: If + S +V-e/es, S + will (not) +V If + does n’t/ don’t + V, If + am/is/are , III.Vocabulary(stress, synonyms, definitions…): Unit 4, unit 5,Unit 6,unit 7 , unit 8. IV.Reading : Reading comprehension and cloze text : U3, U5, U6. V. Listening: Unit 4, Unit 7 ( Task 1. T/F, Task 2: Fill in the gap ) VI. Speaking:. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 143. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(144) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School Unit 1: Talking about daily activities. Unit 3: Asking and answering questions about people’s background. Unit 4: Making an interview about your school. Unit 5: Talking about the uses of modern technology Unit 7: Talking about diferent types of media. VII.Writing: A. Sentence transformation: active to passive(present perfect), combine pairs of sentences( who, which, that), make wh-questions, use Which as a connector B. Rearrange jumbled sentences so as to have a correct sentence. 1.was born / Warsaw / Marie Curie / in/ November 7th / on/ 1867. ->…………………………………………………………………. 2. become/ Her/ to/ dream / scientific / a/ career/ was. ->…………………………………………………………………... 3. the / She/ first / was/ at /the / professor / Sorbornne. ->………………………………………………………………….. 4. married / Pierre Curie / She/ 1985/ in. ->…………………………………………………………………… Change these sentences into passive voice 1. My father has just washed the car.-->The car……………………………………....... 2. They have built a new market in this city.--> A new………………………………… 3. The teacher has taught us English.--> We……………………………………………. 4. My parents have bought a house.-- > A ……………………………………………… 5. I have turned on the computer. -- > The……………………………………………… 6. Mai hasn’t done her homework. -- > Mai’s………………………………………… 7. Have you finished your work? -- > Has…………………………………………….. Combine these sentences using Which, Who, that. 1. They didn’t find the money. You had left it.……………………………………………… 2. I don’t like the stories. They have unhappy endings.……………………………………… 3. There’s the boy. He broke the windows.…………………………………… 4. I met the people. You told me about them.………………………………… 5. They are the policemen. The policemen caught the thief.……………………………………………… Which as a connector: 1. It rained all day. This was good for the garden……………….......... 2. She didn’t get the job. It’s made her very depressed……………… 3. The police blocked off the road. That caused a traffic jam……............. 4 You left the key in the car. It’s a real nuisance……………… Make Wh-questions for the underlined words: 1, I was born in Hue.à Where were you born? 2, Jane left her school in 2000.  When did Jane leave school? 3, The new student is 18 years old.  How old is the new student? 4, Tom wanted to meet Mary. 5, They have 2 children. 6, Hoa likes to learn English because it is an international language. Put who, which or that into the gap. 1. What’s the name of the woman……who……… is wearing the red dress? 2. That’s the dictionary……which…….. Bill gave me for my birthday. 3. You are reading the book ……which……. I wanted to read. 4. Do you like the people …who………… Sarah invited to the party ? 5. I’m looking for the student…who………….. gave me this book. 6. I couldn’t understand the man…who…………spoke to me on the phone this morning.. Week 18, Period 54. Date of preparation: 18 /12/2016 Date of teaching: /12/2016 SAMPLE TEST. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 144. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(145) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School I. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will -do sample test 2. Skills: Reading, speaking, listening and writing skill 3. Attitudes: Actively take part in classroom activities, try to find out answers 4. Orientation formation and capacity development - General capacity : self-study, use this point of language to communicate correctly - Specialized capacity : do exercises correctly II. Teaching preparation 1. Method: Integrated, mainly communicative. 2. Techniques: individually, pair work and group work. 3. Teaching aids: projector, blackboard, chalks, handouts and textbook III. Activities of teaching and learning 1. Stabilization: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance. 2. Check-up : Role play the conversation. 3. New lesson:. Content Exercises in handouts. Teacher’s activities T asks sts to do exercises T gives feedback. Students’ activities Work in groups to do exercise. Competences Completing the exercises. Choose the best answer to complete the following sentences 1) We study past and present events in Viet Nam and around the world in .......…….. classes. A. Geography B. History C. English D. Maths 2) Miss Phuong enjoys working with children in a school. She is a ..................... . A. teacher B. student C. peasant D. passenger 3) Which of these expressions is commonly used when people start a conservation? A. Goodbye. See you later. B. Hello. What are you doing? C. Well, it’s been nice meeting you. D. Great. I’ll see you tomorrow. 4) I can speak two .........................- Vietnamese and English. A. addresses B. names C. languages D. occupations 5) I was born in Dong Thap. Dong Thap is my ....................... . A. date of birth B. place of birth C. present address D. surname 6) It is a …………… day, so we decided to go for a walk. A. nice B. good C. beautiful D. All are correct 7) Marie Curie is a brilliant and mature student. A. young B. very good C. having a fully developed mind D. difficult 8) She received a general ......….….…. in local school. A. educate B. education C. educational D. educated 9) My favourite ..……….….. is Literature. A. subject B. teacher C. job D. student 10) Mr. Brown …………… Kensington High School when he was young. A. passed in B. attended C. travelled D. worked 11) The students in Thuy’s class are deaf, dumb and mentally retarded. They are .............. students. A. poor B. rich C. different D. disabled 12) She is doing the demonstration in front of the class. A. taking or needing a lot of time B. not being able to use part of the body C. an act of showing how to do something D. working slowly, over a long period 13) I have decided not to become a professional …….……... . A. photograph B. photography C. photographer D. photographic 14) In England, it is said that Robin Hood robbed ……………. and gave money to the poor. A. the sick B. the rich C. the young D. the unemployed 15) Microsoft Office Word, Excel, PowerPoint are ........................ . A. software B. hardware C. floppy disks D. keyboard 16) We can see a lot of information on the visual display unit (VDU). A. CD ROMs B. mouse C. computer screen D. printer 17) ……………. is used to cook rice, meat, fish and vegetables or keep the food warm. A. TV B. fax machine C. air conditioner D. electric cooker 18) With the development of information technology we can send………..……. from one computer to another. A. houses B. messages C. buildings D. computers. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 145. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(146) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 19) A blind person is a one who cannot ........................ anything. A. hear B. see C. eat D. talk 20) Lan is anxious about her parents’ permission. A. interested B. worried C. cheap D. expensive 21) We are going to the theatre to see a play. A. cartoon B. drama C. comedy D. documentary 22) Which of the following is NOT the type of the mass media? A. TV B. books C. radio D. the Internet 23) The mass media provides information and entertainment. A. receives B. gets C. delivers D. watches 24) TV interferes with family life and ..…….………. . A. communicate B. communication C. communicative D. communicator 25) The house is ..................... . We haven’t cleaned it for ages. A. clean B. dirty C. comfortable D. small 26) ………………… the large crowds, there were enough seats for everyone. A. Although B. Eventhough C. Though D. In spite of 27) They helped the villagers grow cash crops for export. A. crops to be sold B. crops to be used C. crops to be eaten D. crops to be seen 28. Last year we had a bumper crop of strawberries. A. good crop B. cash crop C. poor crop D. bad crop 29) The alarm goes off and Mr. Lam gets up ……….…. 4:30. A. in B. at C. on D. for 30) We are contented ..………….. what we do. A. with B. from C. of D. about 31) Last year I …………….. my summer holidays at a seaside town. A. spend B. spends C. to spend D. spent 32) Mr. Ha worries ......................... his son’s safety. A. on B. for C. about D. at 33) When they met again, they ……………. each other for 10 years. A. don’t see B. hadn’t seen C. doesn’t see D. hadn’t see 34) I am good at ..……….…… books and letters in Chinese. A. read B. to read C. reading D. reads 35) Liz used to ............……. a motorbike. A. rides B. rode C. ridding D. ride 36) Jill isn’t on the phone, ...……………. makes it difficult to contact her. A. this B. which C. who D. that 37) We send letters .....…….…… almost every part of the world with the help of computers. A. to B. on C. in D. from 38) Thousands of animals ........................ in the forest fire. A. have killed B. has killed C. has been killed D. have been killed 39) Please think of a word ......................... comes from a foreign language into Vietnamese. A. which B. who C. it D. this 40) There is a comedy programme …………… ... between 10:15 and 11:00. A. in B. on C. to D. of 41) We haven’t had a good meal .…………….. three weeks. A. in B. since C. ago D. for 42) It’s two years .............................. I last saw Quoc Anh. A. ago B. from C. since D. about 43) Claude didn't ___________ in Canada. A. lived B. use to live C. used to live D. used to living 44) ........................... his illness, he managed to come to school. A. Because B. Because of C. In spite D. In spite of 45) If I ……………. to medical college, I will study medicine. A. go B. went C. goes D. will go 46) I ......….…… in London for a month. A. were B. am C. was D. have been 47) If we raise the roads, they …………….. muddy and flooded after rains. A. weren’t B. will not be C. would not be D. aren’t 48) I ...................... Nancy in London in 1992. A. meet B. had met C. meets D. met. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 146. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(147) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School 49) A nurse is a person ..…………… looks after patients. A. which B. who C. she D. What 50. I remember you. You _______________ to school here. A. were used to going B. have already gone C. went D. used to go Choose the underlined part among A, B, C or D that needs correcting. 51) I used to eating ice cream when I was a child. A B C D 52) Our car has broken, this means we can’t go away tomorrow. A B C D 53) These are the pictures who my son drew when he was young. A B C D 54) Lan and Minh have lived in Ho Chi Minh City in 1999. A B C D 55) If I will do more homework, I will pass my exam. A B C D Reading exercises Choose the one option A, B, C or D to complete the passage. I (1)...............my teaching career nearly ten years ago. I spent six years teaching in a remote village where the villagers were very poor and the living standard was low. Sometimes I was very disappointed (2)................. bad living condition and low pay. I was really homesick. However, at that time with my youth (3)............., I tried my best to devote myself to the noblest career, that was "teaching". I loved my poor little students. They were living in poverty but they could not suffer from empty mind. I am proud (4)............... myself to be a teacher, a hard working "boatman" taking my students to the "destination" of (5) ................. . 1. A. begin B. had begun C. have begun D. began 2. A. though B. in spite of C. because of D. because 3. A. enthusiasm B. culture C. emotion D. movement 4. A. on B. of C. about D. in 5. A. experience B. competence C. knowledge D. background 2, Read the passage and make the correct choice. The computer, one of the most marvelous inventions in our modern age, has been used since 1946. It consists of many different parts such as central processing unit (CPU), CD-ROOMS, keyboard, visual display unit (VDU) or computer screen, mouse, floppy disks, printer and speaker. However, what makes a computer such a miraculous device? Each time you turn it on, with appropriate hardware and software, it is capable of doing almost anything you want. It is a calculating machine which speeds up calculations: it can add, subtract, multiply and divide with lightning speed and perfect accuracy. It is an electronic storage which manages large collections of data. It is a magical typewriter which allows you to type and print any kind of document letters, memos or requests for leave. It is a personal communicator which helps you to interact with other computers and with people around the world. In addition, if you like entertainment, you can relax by playing computer games or listening to computer-played music. 1. marvelous (a) kỳ diệu, phi thường 6. miraculous (a) tuyệt diệu, phi thường 1. What is the passage about? A. The uses of a computer. B. The kinds of computer. C. The capabilities of a computer. D. The different parts of a computer system. 2. Which of the following sentences is true? A. The computer is a calculating machine. B. The computer is an electronic storage device. C. The computer is a magical typewriter and a personal communicator. D. All are correct. 3. According to the writer, a computer can ________. A. add, subtract, multiply and divide. B. can manage large collections of data. C. help us to interact with other computers and people. D. all are correct 4. What makes a computer such a miraculous device? A. Hardware and computer screen. B. Software and floppy disks. C. Keyboard and mouse D. Hardware and Software. 5. A computer can add, subtract, multiply and divide with________. A. lightning speed and perfect accuracy. B. speed and accuracy C. slow speed and perfect accuracy. D. lightning speed and fast accuracy. Read the passage and answer the following questions. I live in a small village called Smallville. It’s about 45 km from the nearest town. There are about 500 people here, and most of them live on farming. I love the village because it is very quiet and life is slow and easy. The. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 147. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(148) Lesson Plan English 10- 1st Semester – Le Hong Phong High School village is always clean – people look after it with great care. The air is always clean, too. It is much more friendly here than in a city because everyone knows everyone else, and if someone has a problem, there are always people who can help. There are only a few things that I don’t like about Smallville. One thing is that we don’t have many things to do in the evening. We don’t have any cinemas or theaters. The other thing is that people always talk about each other, and everyone knows what everyone else is doing. But I still prefer village life to life in a big city. Answer the questions: 1. What is the name of the author’s village?-> . It is Smallville 2. How many people are there in the village?-> There are 500 people here. 3. What do most of the people in the village do?-> They are farmers 4. Do the villagers have a fast life?-> No, they don’t 5. Why is the village always clean?-> . Because people look after it with great care. 6. What doesn’t the author like about his village? -> They don’t have many things to do in the evening. They don’t have any cinemas or theaters. - People always talk about each other and everyone knows what everyone else is doing Tổ trưởng kí duyệt week 18 19/12/2016. Hứa Thị Hoài Thanh. Wednesday, November 10, 2021 Hong Tham. 148. Teacher: Tran Thi.

(149)

tieng anh 10 theo dinh huong nang luc giao an 4 cot

Tài liệu liên quan

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về